HP Hewlett Packard Printer SunSoft Pascal 40 User Manual

Pascal4.0User’sGuide

A Sun Microsystems, Inc. Business

2550 Garcia Avenue

Mountain View, CA 94043

U.S.A.

Part No.: 802-2943-10

Revision A, November 1995

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix

1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pascal Compiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Text Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Debuggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

XView Toolkit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Native Language Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Locale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Pascal Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A Simple Pascal Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Compiling the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Running the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Renaming the Executable File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

An Interactive Pascal Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compiling the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Running the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Redirecting I/ O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using a File Name as a File Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Where Did My Program Fail?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Pascal Traceback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using a Sample Program with Segmentation Violation . . .

3. The Pascal Compiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

pcVersion Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compile and Link Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Language Preprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

File Name Extensions Accepted By pc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Option-Passing on the Command-Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Option-Passing in the Program Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–a. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–Bbinding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–b. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-bsdmalloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–c. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-calign. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–cg89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–cg92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-cond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–Dname[=def]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–dalign. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-dn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-dryrun. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-dy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-fnonstd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–fns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–fround=r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–ftrap=t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–g. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-hname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–helpor -flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–Ipathname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–iname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-keeptmp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–l. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-Ldirectory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-libmieee. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–libmil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–llib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–misalign. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-mt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–native. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-nocx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-nolib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–nolibmil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-noqueue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-notrace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–O[level]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–oﬁlename. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–pand –pg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–pic, -Kpicand –PIC, -KPIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–Qoption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–Qpathpathname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–Qproduce. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-qp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-Rpath[:dir]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-Rw. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–s[level]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–sb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–sbfast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-tc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–temp=dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–Uname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–V0and –V1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–v. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–w. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xarch=a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xcache=c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xchip=c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xcg89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xcg92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–xF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xildoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xildon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–xl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

vii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-xlibmieee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xlibmil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xlibmopt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–xlicinfo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–xMerge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xnolib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xnolibmopt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-x05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xpg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xprofile=p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xregs=r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–xs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xsafe=mem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xsb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xsbfast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xtarget=t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-ztext. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Program Construction and Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Program Units and Module Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compiling with Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Units and Header Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

viii

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sharing Variables Between Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Separate Compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Working with Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Program Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Module Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sharing Variables and Routines Across Multiple Units . . . . . .

Compiling without the -xlOption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the -xlOption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sharing Declarations in Multiple Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. The C–Pascal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compilation of Mixed-Language Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compatibility of Types for C and Pascal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Precautions with Compatible Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Incompatibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Parameter Passing in C and Pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure Calls: C–Pascal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Variable Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Value Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Function Return Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Input and Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Procedure Calls: Pascal–C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Variable Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Value Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Function Return Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Parameters That Are Pointers to Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Procedures and Functions as Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Global Variables in C and Pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

File-Passing Between Pascal and C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

7. The C++–Pascal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Sample Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Compatibility of Types for C++ and Pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

C++ Name Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Procedure Calls: C++–Pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Arguments Passed by Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Arguments Passed by Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Function Return Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Procedure Calls: Pascal–C++ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Arguments Passed by Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Arguments Passed by Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Function Return Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Global Variables in C++ and Pascal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Pascal File Pointers to C++ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

8. The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Compiler Mixed-Language Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Compatibility of Types for FORTRAN and Pascal. . . . . . . . . . . 164

Precautions with Compatible Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Incompatibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General Parameter-Passing in FORTRAN and Pascal. . . . . . . . 167

Procedure Calls: FORTRAN-Pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Variable Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Value Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Function Return Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Procedure Calls: Pascal-FORTRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Variable Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Value Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Function Return Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Routines as Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

9. Error Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Compiler Syntax Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Illegal Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

String Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Digits in Real Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Replacements, Insertions, and Deletions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Undeﬁned or Improper Identiﬁers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Expected Symbols and Malformed Constructs . . . . . . . . . . 208

Expected and Unexpected End-of-ﬁle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Compiler Semantic Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Format of the Error Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Incompatible Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The scalarClass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Procedure and Function Type Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Scalar Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Expression Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Type Equivalence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Unreachable Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

The gotoStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Uninitialized Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Unused Variables, Constants, Types, Labels, and Routines 216

Compiler Panics, I/ O Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Runtime Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

10. The XView Toolkit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Object-Oriented Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Pascal Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Compiling with Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Header Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Attribute Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Coding Fragment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Conversion of C to Pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

xii

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

An Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Sample Translation of an XView Function to Pascal . . . . . . 229

Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Menu Demo Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

11. Math Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Contents of the Math Libraries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

libmFunctions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

IEEE Support Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

ieee_functions(). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

ieee_values(). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

ieee_retrospective(). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

SPARC Libraries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Arithmetic Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Math Library Exception-Handling Function: matherr(). . . . 240

libsunmathSupport for IEEE Modes and Exceptions . . . . . . 242

Contents

xiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

xiv

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figures

Figure 3-1

Figure 3-2

Organization of Pascal Compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Options in Program Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 10-1 A Sample Class Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

223

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

xvi

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tables

Table 3-1

Table 3-2

Table 3-3

Table 3-4

Table 3-5

Table 3-6

Table 3-7

Table 3-8

Table 3-9

Table 6-1

Table 6-2

File Name Suffixes Recognized by Pascal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Options That Can Be Passed in Program Text . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The -xarchValues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The -xcacheValues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The -xchipValues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The -xprofileValues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The -xregsValues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The -xtargetValues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-xtargetExpansions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C and Pascal Size and Alignment of Compatible Types . . . . .

C and Pascal Size and Alignment of Compatible Types with –xl

Table 6-3

Table 8-1

Set Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

110

165

Default Sizes and Alignments of Compatible Types (Pascal and

FORTRAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

–xl

with –xl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 10-1

Table 11-1

C Declarations to Pascal Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents of Math Libraries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

228

234

xviii

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preface

This manual describes the Pascal 4.0 compiler from SunSoft™. The purpose of

this manual is to help you begin writing and compiling Pascal programs on a

SPARCstation™.

In a previous major release, this Pascal compiler also ran on Solaris 1.x. Some

features remain in the documentation as being for Solaris 1.x only.

The READMEﬁle that accompanies the product contains other release-speciﬁc

information,

Note – All references to Pascal in this manual refer to the Pascal 4.0 compiler

unless otherwise indicated.

Operating Environment

For information on the operating environment, see the READMEﬁle.

Installation

For instructions on how to install Pascal, refer to the Installing SunSoft

Developer Products (SPARC/Solaris) manual.

xix

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Audience

This guide was prepared for software engineers who write Pascal programs on

a SPARCstation. It assumes you are familiar with ISO standard Pascal and the

Solaris™ operating system.

Organization

This guide contains the following chapters:

• Chapter 1, “Introduction,” gives basic information about the Pascal

compiler and related program development tools.

• Chapter 2, “Pascal Programs,” describes how to write, compile, and run a

Pascal program.

• Chapter 3, “The Pascal Compiler,” describes the pccommand and its

options.

• Chapter 4, “Program Construction and Management,” is an introduction to

how complex programs are built in Pascal.

• Chapter 5, “Separate Compilation,” describes how programs can be

divided into several units, and how they are compiled and linked.

• Chapter 6, “The C–Pascal Interface,” describes how to write programs that

are partly in C and partly in Pascal.

• Chapter 7, “The C++–Pascal Interface,” describes how to write programs

that are partly in C++ and partly in Pascal.

• Chapter 8, “The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface,” describes how to write

programs that are partly in FORTRAN and partly in Pascal.

• Chapter 9, “Error Diagnostics,” describes the errors you may encounter

while writing programs with Pascal.

• Chapter 10, “The XView Toolkit,” describes how to use the XView toolkit

with Pascal.

• Chapter 11, “Math Libraries,” describes how to use the libmand

libsunmathfunctions in Pascal programs.

• Appendix A, “Pascal Preprocessor,” describes the Pascal preprocessors,

with emphasis on the nonstandard preprocessor, cppas.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Appendix B, “Error Messages,” lists all the error messages the compiler

produces.

This guide concludes with an index.

Conventions Used in This Guide

This guide contains syntax diagrams of the Pascal language in extended

Backus-Naur Formalism (BNF) notation. Here are the meta symbols:

Table P-1 BNF Meta Symbols

Meta Symbol

Description

::=

Deﬁned as

Can be used as an alternative

Either a or b

(a | b)

[ a ]

{ a }

'abc'

Zero or one instance of a

Zero or more instances of a

The characters abc

The following table describes the type styles and symbols used in this guide:

Table P-2 Typographic Conventions

Typeface or

Symbol

Meaning

Example

AaBbCc123 The names of commands, ﬁles, and

Edit your .loginﬁle.

directories; on-screen computer output Use ls -ato list all ﬁles.

hostname% You have mail.

AaBbCc123 What you type, contrasted with on-

hostname% su

screen computer output

Password:

AaBbCc123 Command-line placeholder:

To delete a ﬁle, type rmﬁlename.

replace with a real name or value

AaBbCc123 Book titles, new words or terms, or

Read the User’s Guide.

words to be emphasized

These are called class options.

You must be root to do this.

Preface

xxi

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Shell Prompts in Command Examples

The following table shows the default system prompt and superuser prompt

for the C shell, Bourne shell, and Korn shell.

Table P-3 Shell Prompts

Shell

Prompt

C shell prompt

machine_name%

C shell superuser prompt

Bourne shell and Korn shell prompt

Bourne shell and Korn shell superuser prompt

machine_name#

Other Related Documentation

Other reference material includes:

Proﬁling Tools

Numerical Computation Guide

Documents in Hard Copy and in AnswerBook

The following table shows what documents are on-line, in hard copy, or both:

Table P-4 Documents in Hard Copy and in AnswerBook

Title

Hard Copy

On-Line

X (AnswerBook)

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Pascal 4.0 Reference Manual

Pascal 4.0 Quick Reference

Installing SunSoft Developer Products (SPARC/Solaris)

Proﬁling Tools

X (AnswerBook)

Preface

xxiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table P-4 Documents in Hard Copy and in AnswerBook (Continued)

Title

Hard Copy

On-Line

X (AnswerBook)

Numerical Computation Guide

README

X (CD-ROM)

What Every Scientist Should Know About Floating-Point Arithmetic

X (AnswerBook and CD-ROM)

xxiv

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

This chapter gives an overview of the features of Pascal, including

compatibility, internationalization, and licensing. It contains the following

sections:

Standards

page 1

page 2

page 3

page 5

Pascal Compiler

Features

Compatibility

Text Editors

Debuggers

XView Toolkit

Native Language Support

Licensing

Standards

Pascal is a derivative of the Berkeley Pascal system distributed with UNIX 4.2

BSD. It complies with FIPS PUB 109 ANSI/ IEEE 770 X3.97-1983 and

BS6192/ ISO7185 at both level 0 and level 1.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pascal Compiler

The name of the Pascal compiler is pc. If given an argument ﬁle name ending

with .por .pas, pccompiles the ﬁle and leaves the result in an executable

ﬁle, called a.outby default.

Features

Pascal includes many extensions to the standard, including the following:

• Separate compilation of programs and modules

• dbx(symbolic debugger) support

• Optimizer support

• Multiple label, const, type, and vardeclarations

• Variable-length character strings

• Compile-time initializations

• staticand externdeclarations

• Different sizes of integer and realdata types

• Integer constants in any base, from 2 to 16

• Extended input/ output facilities

• Extended library of built-in functions and procedures

• Universal and function and procedure pointer types

• Direction of parameter passing: into a routine, out of a routine, or both

• Functions that return structured-type results

Note – For other release-speciﬁc information, please refer to the READMEﬁle

that accompanies the product release.

Compatibility

In general, Pascal 4.0 runs in the Solaris 2.x or above operating environment.

This product is not compatible with /usr/ucblib/libucb.aon the Solaris

2.x environment.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Text Editors

The operating system provides two main editors:

• Text Editor—A window-based text editor that runs in the OpenWindows

environment. Start this tool by typing texteditat the system prompt.

• vi—The standard visual display editor that offers the capabilities of both a

line and a screen editor. It also provides several commands for editing

programs. For example:

• The autoindentoption provides white space at the beginning of a line.

• The showmatchoption shows matching parentheses.

Debuggers

SunSoft offers a variety of programming tools that run in the Solaris operating

environment. For debugging, the following tools are available:

• dbx—A symbolic debugger

• debugger—A window- and mouse-based version of the symbolic debugger

You can use Pascal with ﬁx-and-continue, a debugger functionality. See the

debugger documentation for details of this feature.

XView Toolkit

The XView application programmer’s interface (API) is an object-oriented and

server-based user-interface toolkit for the X Window System Version 11 (X11).

It is designed for manipulating XView windows and other XView objects.

Chapter 10, “The XView Toolkit,” describes how to use XView with Pascal.

Native Language Support

Sun supports the development of applications in languages other than English.

These languages include most European languages and Japanese. As a result,

you can easily switch your application from one native language to another.

This feature is known as internationalization.

Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internationalization

A product can support up to four levels of internationalization:

• Level 1—Allows native-language characters (such as the a-umlaut). This is

referred to as the 8-bit clean model because the eighth bit in each byte is

used to represent native-language characters.

• Level 2—Recognizes and displays international date and time formats, such

as 26.07.90 in Italian; international decimal units, such as 1.234.567,89 in

French; and international monetary units, such as 1.234,56 Pts in Spanish.

• Level 3—Contains support for localized messages and text presentation.

• Level 4—Contains Asian language support.

Pascal supports all four levels. See the Pascal 4.0 Reference Manual for a

description of the dateand timefunctions in internationalized formats.

Pascal does not allow input and output in the various international formats. If

it does, it does not comply with the Pascal language standard, ANSI/ IEEE

770 X3.97-1983.

For example, the standard speciﬁes a period (.) as the decimal unit in the

ﬂoating-point representation. Consider the following program, which prints a

ﬂoating-point value:

program sample(output);

var r : real := 1.2;

begin

writeln(r);

end.

When you compile and run the program on the internationalized Pascal

compiler, the output is:

1.20000000000000e+00

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If you reset your system locale to, for example, France, and rerun the program,

the output is the same. Pascal does not replace the period with a comma, the

French decimal unit.

Locale

You can change your application from one native language to another by

setting the locale. For information on this and other native language support

features, see the Solaris documentation on internationalization.

Licensing

This compiler uses network licensing, as described in the manual, Installing

SunSoft Developer Products (SPARC/Solaris).

When you invoke the compiler, if a license is available, the compiler starts. If

no license is available, your request for a license is put on a queue, and your

compile job continues when a license becomes available. A single license can

be used for any number of simultaneous compiles by a single user on a single

machine. There are two licensing-related options:

• -noqueue—Does not queue request if no license is available.

• -xlicinfo—Returns information on the status of licensing.

The -xlicinfooption does not check out a license.

For details on how to obtain a license—where to call, what information to have

ready—refer to the manual, Installing SunSoft Developer Products

(SPARC/Solaris).

Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PascalPrograms

This chapter cites two examples that illustrate how to compile and execute a

program. It also explains how to use the traceback facility to ﬁnd out why a

program fails. The sections are:

A Simple Pascal Program

page 7

An Interactive Pascal Program

Where Did My Program Fail?

page 10

page 13

Building a program with SPARCompiler Pascal requires three steps:

1. Writing a program in Pascal using an editor and saving it in a ﬁle with a

.por .passufﬁx

2. Compiling the .por .pasﬁle using the pccommand

3. Executing the program by typing the name of the executable ﬁle at the

system prompt

A Simple Pascal Program

The following is a simple Pascal program that converts temperatures from

Fahrenheit to Celsius. Use an editor to type the code on your system and save

it in a ﬁle called temp.p.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

program temperature(output) ;

{ Program to convert temperatures from

Fahrenheit to Celsius. }

const

MIN = 32 ;

MAX = 50 ;

CONVERT = 5 / 9 ;

var

fahren: integer ;

celsius: real ;

begin

writeln('Fahrenheit

writeln('----------

Celsius') ;

-------') ;

for fahren := MIN to MAX do begin

celsius := CONVERT * (fahren - 32) ;

writeln(fahren: 5, celsius: 18: 2) ;

end ;

end.

Compiling the Program

Now compile the program with pc, the Pascal compiler, by typing at the

system prompt:

hostname% pc temp.p

Pascal names the compiled version of the program a.outby default.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Running the Program

To run the program, enter a.outat the prompt. The output of temp.pis then

displayed:

hostname% a.out

Fahrenheit

----------

Celsius

-------

0.00

0.56

1.11

1.67

2.22

2.78

3.33

3.89

4.44

5.00

5.56

6.11

6.67

7.22

7.78

8.33

8.89

9.44

10.00

Renaming the Executable File

It is inconvenient to have the result of every compilation in a ﬁle called a.out.

If such a ﬁle already exists, it is overwritten. You can avoid this in either of the

two following ways:

• Change the name of a.outafter each compilation with the mvcommand:

hostname% mv a.out temp

• Use the compiler –ooption to name the output executable ﬁle. This

example places the executable code in the ﬁle temp:

hostname% pc –o temp temp.p

Pascal Programs

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Now run the program by typing the name of the executable ﬁle. The output

follows:

hostname% temp

Fahrenheit

----------

Celsius

-------

0.00

0.56

1.11

An Interactive Pascal Program

In Pascal, the predeﬁned ﬁle variable, input, is equivalent to the operating

system standard input ﬁle, stdin. Similarly, the ﬁle variable, output, is

equivalent to the standard output ﬁle, stdout.

Following is a Pascal program that copies inputto output. Use an editor to

type the code on your system and store it in a ﬁle called copy.p:

program copy(input, output);

{ This program copies input to output. }

var

c: char;

begin

while not eof do begin

while not eoln do begin

read(c);

write(c)

end;

readln;

writeln

end

end. { copy }

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Compiling the Program

Use the pccommand to compile the program and store it in the executable ﬁle

copy. Here is the command format:

hostname% pc -o copy copy.p

Running the Program

Because the standard ﬁles inputand outputdefault to the terminal, the

program simply echoes each line you type. The program terminates when you

type the end-of-ﬁle (Control-d) character at the beginning of a line. Try it:

hostname% copy

hello, are you listening?

goodbye, I must go now.

(Control-d)

Redirecting I/O

To write the output to a ﬁle instead of to the terminal, use the redirection

operator, >, followed by a ﬁle name. For instance, to write to a ﬁle called

data, enter the following:

hostname% copy > data

hello, are you listening?

goodbye, I must go now.

(Control-d)

Pascal Programs

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the same program, but with the <operator to redirect input, you can

print the ﬁle on the terminal:

hostname% copy < data

hello, are you listening?

goodbye, I must go now.

Using a File Name as a File Variable

You can also redirect the output by listing the ﬁle as a ﬁle variable in the

program statement. The Pascal library associates the ﬁle variable with a ﬁle of

the same name. For example, copy2.plists dataas the input ﬁle variable:

program copy2(data, output);

{ This program redirects input. }

var

c: char;

data: text;

begin

reset(data);

while not eof(data) do begin

while not eoln(data) do begin

read(data, c);

write(c)

end;

readln(data);

writeln

end

end. { copy2 }

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Assuming that the ﬁle datais still in the current directory, you can compile

and run the program as follows:

hostname% pc -o copy2 copy2.p

hostname% copy2

hello, are you listening?

goodbye, I must go now.

Where Did My Program Fail?

SPARCompiler Pascal can trace why a program failed; its traceback utility

ﬁnds the routine that triggers the error.

Using Pascal Traceback

Pascal traceback installs signal handlers on selected signals and dumps a

backtrace when those signals are caught. The backtrace shows the chain of

calls leading from the routine in which the error occurred, all the way back to

the main program.

Pascal catches the following set of signals:

SIGQUIT

SIGILL

SIGIOT

SIGABRT

SIGEMT

SIGFPE

SIGBUS

SIGSEGV

SIGSYS

SIGTERM

SIGLOST

SIGPIPE

SIGTRAP

See the signal(3) man page for further information on these signals.

After the system produces the traceback, it continues with whatever action it

would have taken if the interposer had not been in place, including calling a

user signal handler that was previously set.

The traceback facility uses the debugger dbx. To obtain a traceback,

SPARCworks must be installed on your system, and the directory containing

dbxmust be in your PATHenvironment variable. If the traceback routine

cannot ﬁnd dbx, it does not produce the traceback.

Use the -notracecommand-line option to disable traceback.

Pascal Programs

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using a Sample Program with Segmentation Violation

A segmentation violation occurs when your program tries to reference memory

outside your address space. The operating system detects this action and

generates an error message. Following is an example program, SegViol.p,

which contains a segmentation violation:

program SegmentationViolation;

type

Pinteger = ^integer;

procedure ErrorInHere;

var

IntVar: integer;

NullPtr: Pinteger;

begin

NullPtr := nil;

{ Next statement causes a SEGV }

IntVar := NullPtr^;

end;

procedure Call1;

procedure Call2;

begin

ErrorInHere;

end;

begin

Call2;

end;

begin

Call1;

end.

Compiling and Running the Program

When you compile and run the program, you receive output similar to the

following. The ﬁrst line indicates the name of the offending signal—in this

case, a segmentation violation.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

hostname% pc SegViol.p

hostname% a.out

*** a.out terminated by signal 11: segmentation violation

*** Traceback being written to a.out.trace

Abort (core dumped)

hostname% more a.out.trace

*** Stacktrace of a.out

*** Program terminated due to segmentation violation

[3] __PC0__sigdie(0xb, 0xefffedf0, 0xefffec30, 0x0, 0x1, 0x0), at 0x12128

---- called from signal handler with signal 11 (SIGSEGV) ------

[4] ErrorInHere(), at 0x115ec

[5] Call2(0xefffefc8, 0xefffefa8, 0xefffef88, 0x0, 0xef74dd58, 0x0), at 0x11624

[6] Call1(0x25400, 0x25800, 0x25b80, 0x25b80, 0x3, 0x0), at 0x11660

[7] program(0x1, 0xeffff0fc, 0x4, 0xef7d0000, 0x2, 0xef74dae8), at 0x116a4

[8] main(0x1, 0xeffff0fc, 0xeffff104, 0x25000, 0x0, 0x0), at 0x116e0

detaching from process 17266

In this example, ErrorInHerereported the error. The ErrorInHere

procedure was called by Call1.Call2, which was in turn called by the main

program. Routine names, such as Call1.Call2, indicate a nested routine. If

Pascal cannot ﬁnd the name of a routine, for example, because the executable

ﬁle has been stripped, it prints the hex address.

Using the -gOption

If you compile the program with the –goption, the traceback also reports the

arguments, the line number, and the ﬁle name of each routine.

Pascal Programs

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Try compiling SegViol.pwith –g:

hostname% pc -g SegViol.p

hostname% a.out

*** a.out terminated by signal 11: segmentation violation

*** Traceback being written to a.out.trace

Abort (core dumped)

hostname% more a.out.trace

*** Stacktrace of a.out

*** Program terminated due to segmentation violation

[3] __PC0__sigdie(0xb, 0xefffedf0, 0xefffec30, 0x0, 0x1, 0x0), at 0x12128

---- called from signal handler with signal 11 (SIGSEGV) ------

[4] ErrorInHere(), line 12 in “SegViol.p”

[5] Call2(), line 18 in "SegViol.p"

[6] Call1(), line 21 in "SegViol.p"

[7] program(), line 25 in "SegViol.p"

detaching from process 17285

The program prints the ASCII values of character variables.

If you compile some modules with –gand others without, the line numbers

may not be accurate for all the routines.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ThePascalCompiler

The name of the Pascal compiler is pc. If you give pca ﬁle name as an

argument, and the ﬁle name ends with .por .pas, pccompiles the ﬁle and

leaves the result in an executable ﬁle, called a.outby default.

The syntax of this command is:

pc [options] ﬁlename

This chapter contains the following sections:

pc Version Number

page 17

page 18

page 19

page 20

page 21

page 23

Compile and Link Sequence

Language Preprocessor

File Name Extensions Accepted By pc

Option-Passing on the Command-Line

Option-Passing in the Program Text

Options

pcVersion Number

To identify the version number of pcwhen you compile your program, call the

compiler with the –Voption. This option instructs the compiler to produce

output that identiﬁes the versions of all the programs used in compiling, the

compiler itself, the code generator, and so on.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To identify the version number given an executable or object ﬁle created by the

Pascal compiler, use the following command.

hostname% mcs -p a.out | grep Pascal

SC4.0 18 Mar 1995 Pascal 4.0

Compile and Link Sequence

You can compile the ﬁle any.pwith the following command-line:

hostname% pc any.p

This command actually invokes the compiler driver, which calls several

programs or passes of the program, each of which processes the program. The

output of each pass is the input to the next one.

After several passes, the object ﬁle any.ois created. An executable ﬁle is then

generated with the default name a.out. Finally, the ﬁle any.ois removed.

pccalls:

• cpp, the C preprocessor or cppas, the preprocessor used when you use the

-xloption

• pc0, the Pascal front end

• The global optimizer if you use the -Ooption

• cg, the code generator, which generates the relocatable object ﬁle

• pc3, which checks for conﬂicts in symbol names

• ld, the linker, which generates the executable ﬁles using any libraries

necessary to resolve undeﬁned symbols

The above is the default action of pc; some compiler options change what pc

calls.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure 3-1 shows the sequence of events when you invoke pc.

Compiler

Symbol con-

ﬂict checking

pc3

Link

editor

Compiler

preprocessor

cppor cppas

Compiler

frontend

pc0

Code

generator

Executable

a.out

Source and

includeﬁles

Optimize with

-O[level]option

Optimizer

iropt

Libraries

Figure 3-1 Organization of Pascal Compilation

Language Preprocessor

The cpp(1) program is the C language preprocessor. The compiler driver pc

normally calls cpp(1) during the ﬁrst pass of a Pascal compilation. If you use

the –xlswitch, pccalls the alternate preprocessor cppas. Then cpp(1) and

cppasoperate on ﬁles that contain the extension .por .pas.

You can give directives to cpp(1) or cppasto deﬁne constants, conditionally

compile parts of your program, include external ﬁles, and take other actions.

For example, the following program shows the use of an includedirective,

which asks cpp(1) to copy the named ﬁle into the program before compilation.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

program showinclude;

#include "file.i"

begin

...

end.

See the man page for cpp(1) for information on its directives and other

features. Appendix A, “Pascal Preprocessor,” describes cppas.

File Name Extensions Accepted By pc

Pascal source ﬁles generally use the extension .p. The compiler recognizes

other ﬁle name extensions. Table 3-1 lists the most important extensions.

The table notes that pccan produce assembler source ﬁles as well as unlinked

object ﬁles. In each case, you can pass these partially compiled ﬁles to pc,

which then ﬁnishes the compilation, linking, and loading.

Table 3-1 File Name Sufﬁxes Recognized by Pascal

Sufﬁx

Description

Usual extension for Pascal source ﬁles.

.pas

Valid extension for a Pascal source ﬁle. The extension instructs pc

to put object ﬁles in the current directory. The default name of the

object ﬁle is the name of the source ﬁle, but with a .osufﬁx.

.pi

Default extension for Pascal source ﬁles that have been processed by

the Pascal preprocessor (either cppor cppas).

Extension for assembler source ﬁles that are produced when you call

pcwith the -Soption.

Extension for object ﬁles that are generated by the compiler when

you call pcwith the -coption.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Option-Passing on the Command-Line

To pass an option on the command-line, use a dash (-) followed by the option

name. In some cases, you must supply additional information, such as a ﬁle

name. For example, this command activates the listing option -l, which is off

by default:

hostname% pc -l rmc.p

The following command causes the generated object ﬁle to be named rmc

instead of the default, a.out.

hostname% pc -o rmc rmc.p

Option-Passing in the Program Text

Some options can be passed to the compiler in program text as well as on the

command-line. With this facility, you can use different option values for

different parts of a program.

Here are four examples of how options can be passed in program text:

{$P+}

{$H*}

(*$I-*)

{$l+,L-,n+}

Table 3-2 shows the options that can be passed in program text.

Table 3-2 Options That Can Be Passed in Program Text

Option

Description

Uses buffering of the ﬁle output.

Uses runtime checks (same as t).

Uses C data formats.

calign

Uses check heap pointers.

Makes a listing.

Maps identiﬁers and keywords to lowercase.

Uses statement limit counting (different from command-line p ). See

stlimitin the Pascal 4.0 Reference Manual.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-2 Options That Can Be Passed in Program Text (Continued)

Option

Description

Uses partial evaluation of booleanexpressions.

Uses runtime checks (same as C, but different from the command-line t ).

Trims to 72-character line (not usable on command-line).

Prints warning diagnostics.

1. The options pand tare different when they are used within program text and when they are used on the

command-line because they are received directly by pc0when they are used in program text, while the

compiler driver gives them to other compiler passes when they are given on the command-line. If you want

to set them on the command-line and also want them to have the same effect as passing them in program

text, use the Qoptioncommand-line option to pass them directly to pc0.

You set options within comments, which can be delimited by either {and}or

(*and*). The ﬁrst character in the comment must be the $(dollar sign). $

must be immediately followed by an option letter. Next must be either +, -, or

If you want to set more than one option, you can insert a comma after the ﬁrst

option, followed by another option letter and +, -, or *. You can set any

number of options on a single line. There must be no embedded spaces. You

can place spaces and other ordinary comment text after the last +, -, or *.

The new option setting takes effect at the next noncomment token.

The symbols +(plus sign) and -(minus sign) turn the option on and off,

respectively. To understand the symbol *, you must know how options work

in Pascal.

Except for b, each option in Table 3-2 has a current value and a “ﬁrst in, last

out” stack of up to 16 values. Again, except for b, each option can be on or off.

When you begin compiling a program, each stack is empty and each option has

an initial current value, which may be the option default value or may have

been set on the command line.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When the compiler encounters an

option followed by...

This is what happens...

The current value is pushed onto the stack, and

the current value becomes ON.

The current value is pushed onto the stack, and

the current value becomes OFF.

The last value is popped off the stack and

becomes the current value.

If no values have been pushed onto the stack, the effect of *is undeﬁned.

Figure 3-2 illustrates how options are passed in program text.

Program:

Output:

program options (output);

begin

hostname% pc options.p

Fri Mar 1 17:33:18 1995 options.p:

4 writeln ('After $l-');

5 {$l- Turns off listing}

6 {Notice that this line prints.}

10 writeln ('After $l*')

11 end.

{$l+ Turns on listing}

writeln ('After $l-');

{$l- Turns off listing}

{Notice that this line prints.}

writeln ('After $l+');

{$l* Turns listing on again}

{Notice that this line does not print.}

writeln ('After $l*')

end.

Figure 3-2 Options in Program Text

Options

This section describes all the pccommand options in alphabetical order.

Unless otherwise stated at the beginning of the description for the option, all of

these options work for both the Solaris 1.x and Solaris 2.x environments.

In general, processing of the compiler options is from left to right, so selective

overriding of macros can be done. This rule does not apply to linker options.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–a

The –aoption is the old style of basic block proﬁling for tcov. See

-xprofile=tcovfor information on the new style of proﬁling and the

tcov(1) man page for more details. Also see the manual, Proﬁling Tools.

The –aoption inserts code to count how many times each basic block is

executed. It also calls a runtime recording mechanism that creates a .dﬁle for

every .pﬁle at normal termination. The .dﬁle accumulates execution data for

the corresponding source ﬁle. The tcov(1) utility can then be run on the

source ﬁle to generate statistics about the program.

If set at compile-time, the TCOVDIRenvironment variable speciﬁes the

directory of where the .dﬁles are located. If this variable is not set, then the

.dﬁles remain in the same directory as the .fﬁles.

The -xprofile=tcovand the -aoptions are compatible in a single

executable. That is, you can link a program that contains some ﬁles which

have been compiled with -xprofile=tcov, and others with -a. You cannot

compile a single ﬁle with both options.

–Bbinding

The –Boption speciﬁes whether libraries for linking are static(not shared,

indicated with -Bstatic), or dynamic(shared, indicated with -Bdynamic).

Link editing is the set of operations necessary to build an executable program

from one or more object ﬁles. Static linking indicates that the results of these

operations are saved to a ﬁle. Dynamic linking refers to these operations when

performed at runtime. The executable that results from dynamic linking

appears in the running process, but is not saved to a ﬁle.

–b

It is inefﬁcient for Pascal to send each character to a terminal as it generates its

output. It is even less efﬁcient if the output is the input of another program,

such as the line printer daemon, lpr(1).

To gain efﬁciency, Pascal buffers output characters; it saves the characters in

memory until the buffer is full and then outputs the entire buffer in one system

interaction. By default, Pascal output is line-buffered.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The –boption on the command-line turns on block-buffering with a block size

of 1,024. You cannot turn off buffering from the command-line.

If you give the –boption in a comment in the program, you can turn off

buffering or turn on block buffering. The valid values are:

{$b0}

{$b1}

{$b2}

No buffering

Line buffering

Block buffering. The block size is 1,024.

Any number greater than 2 (for example, {$b5}) is treated as {$b2}. You can

only use this option in the main program. The block buffering value in effect

at the end of the main program is used for the entire program.

-bsdmalloc

(Solaris 1.x only) The -bsdmallocoption speciﬁes faster malloc and uses the

more efﬁcient malloc from the library, libbsdmalloc.a. This option also

causes the ﬂags, -u _malloc /lib/libbsdmalloc.a, to be passed to the

linker.

–C

The –Coption enables runtime checks that veriﬁes that:

• Subscripts and subranges are in range.

• The number of lines written to output does not exceed the number set by

the linelimitprocedure. (See the Pascal 4.0 Reference Manual for

information on linelimit.)

• Overﬂow, underﬂow, and divide-by-zero do not exist.

• The assertstatement is correct. (See the Pascal 4.0 Reference Manual for

information on assert.)

If you do not specify –C, most runtime checks are disabled, and pctreats the

assertstatement as a comment and never uses calls to the linelimit

procedure to halt the program. However, divide-by-zero checks are always

made.

The –V0and –V1options implicitly turn on –C.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–c

The –coption instructs the compiler not to call the linker, ld(1). The Pascal

compiler, pc, leaves a .oor object ﬁle for each source ﬁle. Without –c, pccalls

the linker when it ﬁnishes compilation, and produces an executable ﬁle, called

a.outby default.

-calign

The -calignoption instructs the compiler to allocate storage in records the

same way as the C compiler allocates structures. See the Pascal 4.0 Reference

Manual for details of how data is aligned with and without -calign.

You can use calignwithin a program as well as on the command-line.

However, calignonly has an effect in the typeand varsections of the

program. Any types you deﬁne when calignis on use C-style alignment

whenever you deﬁne variables of that type.

–cg89

–cg92

-cond

(Solaris 1.x only) The –cg89option generates code to run on generic SPARC

architecture.

(Solaris 2.x only) This option is a macro for:

-xarch=v7-xchip=old-xcache=64/32/1.

(Solaris 1.x only) The –cg92option generates code to run on SPARC V8

architecture.

(Solaris 2.x only) This option is a macro for:

-xarch=v8-xchip=super-xcache=16/64/4:1024/64/1

You can only use this option when you also use the -xloption.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The –condoption instructs pcto compile the lines in your program that begin

with the %debugcompiler directive. If you compile your program without

–cond, pctreats lines with the %debugdirective as comments.

–xlruns your program through the preprocessor cppas, which handles the

Apollo DOMAIN^®-style Pascal compiler directives, such as %debug.

See Appendix A, “Pascal Preprocessor,” for a complete description of

conditional variables, cppas, and compiler directives.

–config

You can only use this option when you also use the -xloption.

The –configoption sets a conditional variable to true. You can only use this

option when you use the preprocessor cppas, which is invoked when you use

the -xloption.

Pascal supports the –configoption with only one value. For example, Pascal

accepts –config one, but not –config one two. To specify more than one

variable, use multiple –configoptions on the command-line.

If you use -configbut do not give a variable, the value of the predeﬁned

conditional variable %configis set to true.

–xlruns your program through the preprocessor cppas, which handles the

Apollo DOMAIN-style Pascal compiler directives, such as %config.

See Appendix A, “Pascal Preprocessor,” for a complete description of conditional

variables, cppas, and compiler directives.

–Dname[=def]

The –Doption deﬁnes a symbol name to the C preprocessor, cpp. It is

equivalent to using the #definestatement in your program. If you do not

include a deﬁnition, name is deﬁned as 1. See cpp(1) for more information.

If you use this option with the -xloption, -Dis equivalent to using the

%configdirective in your program.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–dalign

The –dalignoption instructs the compiler to generate double load and store

instructions wherever possible for faster execution. All double-typed data

become double-aligned, so do not use this option when correct alignment is

not ensured.

-dn

(Solaris 2.x only) The -dnoption speciﬁes static linking in the link editor.

-dryrun

The –dryrunoption instructs the compiler to show, but not execute, the

commands constructed by the compilation driver. You can then see the order

of execution of compiler passes without actually executing them.

-dy

(Solaris 2.x only) The -dyoption speciﬁes dynamic linking in the link editor.

–fast

(Solaris 1.x only) The –fastoption selects optimum compilation options for

speed and provides close to the maximum performance for most realistic

applications. A convenience option, it chooses the fastest code generation

option available on the compile-time hardware, the optimization level -02, the

-dalignoption, and a set of inline expansion templates. If you combine -

fastwith other options, the last speciﬁcation applies.

(Solaris 2.x only) The -fastoption includes -fns-ftrap=%none; that is, it

turns off all trapping. In previous releases, the -fastmacro option included

-fnonstd;now it does not.

-fastincludes -nativein its expansion.

The code generation option, the optimization level, and using inline template

ﬁles can be overridden by subsequent switches. For example, although the

optimization part of -fastis -O2, the optimization part of -fast-03is -03.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Do not use this option for programs that depend on IEEE standard exception

handling; you can get different numerical results, premature program

termination, or unexpected SIGFPEsignals.

Note – The criteria for the -fast option vary with the compilers from SunSoft:

C, C++, FORTRAN 77, Fortran 90, and Pascal. See the appropriate

documentation for the speciﬁcs.

-fnonstd

The -fnonstdoption causes nonstandard initialization of ﬂoating-point

arithmetic hardware. By default, IEEE 754 ﬂoating-point arithmetic is nonstop,

and underﬂows are gradual. (See the Numerical Computation Guide for details.)

The –fnonstdoption causes hardware traps to be enabled for ﬂoating-point

overﬂow, division by zero, and invalid operation exceptions. These hardware

traps are converted into SIGFPEsignals, and if the program has no SIGFPE

handler, it terminates with a memory dump.

-fnonstdalso causes the math library to be linked in by passing -lmto the

linker.

(Solaris 2.x only) This option is a synonym for -fns-ftrap=common.

–fns

(Solaris 2.x only) The -fnsoption turns on the SPARC non-standard ﬂoating-

point mode.

The default is the SPARC standard ﬂoating-point mode.

If you compile one routine with -fns, then compile all routines of the program

with the –fnsoption; otherwise, unexpected results may occur.

–fround=r

(Solaris 2.x only) The -fround=r option sets the IEEE 754 rounding mode that

is established during program initialization.

r must be one of: nearest, tozero, negative, positive.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The default is -fround=nearest.

The meanings are the same as those for the ieee_flagssubroutine.

If you compile one routine with -fround=r, compile all routines of the

program with the same –fround=r option; otherwise, unexpected results may

occur.

–ftrap=t

(Solaris 2.x only) The -ftrap=t option sets the IEEE 754 trapping mode in

effect at startup.

t is a comma-separated list of one or more of the following: %all, %none,

common, [no%]invalid, [no%]overflow, [no%]underflow, [no%]division,

[no%]inexact. The default is -ftrap=%none.

This option sets the IEEE 754 trapping modes that are established at program

initialization. Processing is left-to-right. The common exceptions, by deﬁnition,

are invalid, division by zero, and overﬂow.

Example: -ftrap=%all,no%inexactmeans set all traps, except inexact.

The meanings are the same as for the ieee_flagsfunction, except that:

• %allturns on all the trapping modes.

• %none, the default, turns off all trapping modes.

• A no%preﬁx turns off that speciﬁc trapping mode.

If you compile one routine with -ftrap=t, compile all routines of the program

with the same -ftrap=t option; otherwise, unexpected results may occur.

-G

(Solaris 2.x only) The -Goption builds a shared library. All object ﬁles speciﬁed

with this command option should have been compiled with either the -picor

the -PICoption.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–g

The –goption instructs pcto produce additional symbol table information for

dbxand debugger. With -g, the incremental linker, ild, is called, instead of

ld.

You can compile using both the -gand -Ooptions. However, there are some

side effects:

• The nextand stepcommands do not work, but the contcommand does.

• If you have makeﬁles that rely on -goverriding -O, you must revise those

ﬁles.

• If you have makeﬁles that check for a warning message that -goverrides

-O, you must revise those make ﬁles.

Note – Special case: -04-g. The combination -04-gturns off inlining that

you usually get with -04.

–H

The –Hoption instructs pc to compile code to perform range-checking on

pointers into the heap. This option is implicitly turned on by the –V0and –V1

options.

-hname

(Solaris 2.x only) The -hname option names a shared dynamic library and

provides a way to have versions of a shared dynamic library.

This is a loader option, passed to ld. In general, the name after -hshould be

exactly the same as the one after -o. A space between the -hand name is

optional.

The compile-time loader assigns the speciﬁed name to the shared dynamic

library you are creating. It records the name in the library ﬁle as the intrinsic

name of the library. If there is no -hname option, then no intrinsic name is

recorded in the library ﬁle.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Every executable ﬁle has a list of needed shared library ﬁles. When the

runtime linker links the library into an executable ﬁle, the linker copies the

intrinsic name from the library into that list of needed shared library ﬁles. If

there is no intrinsic name of a shared library, then the linker copies the path of

the shared library ﬁle instead.

–helpor -flags

The –helpor -flagsoption lists and summarizes all available options.

–Ipathname

The –Ioption gives the preprocessor additional places to look for #include

and %includeﬁles. For example,

hostname% pc -I/home/incfiles -I/usr/incfiles program.p

The preprocessor searches for #includeand %includeﬁles in this order:

1. In /opt/SUNWspro/SC4.0/include/pascal

2. In the directory containing the source ﬁle, except when you use the

#include<ﬁle>form, in which case this directory is not searched

3. In directories named with –Ioptions, if any, in left to right order

4. In /usr/include

–iname

The –ioption produces a listing for the speciﬁed procedure, function,

#include, or %includeﬁle. For example, this command instructs the

compiler to make a listing of the routines in the ﬁle scanner.i.

hostname% pc –i scanner.i program.p

See cpp(1), or Chapter 4, “Program Construction and Management,” or

Chapter 5, “Separate Compilation,” for information on includeﬁles.

-keeptmp

The -keeptmpoption keeps temporary ﬁles that are created during

compilation, so they are retained instead of being deleted automatically.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–L

–l

The –Loption maps all keywords and identiﬁers to lowercase. In Pascal,

uppercase and lowercase are not interchangeable in identiﬁers and keywords.

In standard Pascal, the case is insigniﬁcant outside of character strings and

character constants. The –Loption is most useful for transporting programs

from other systems. See also the –soption.

The –loption produces a listing of the program. For example:

hostname% pc -l random.p

Pascal PC -- Version SC4.0 09 Jan 1995 Pascal 4.0

Mon Jan 09 09:04 1995 random.p:

program random_number(output);

var

i: integer;

x: integer;

begin

for i := 1 to 5 do begin

write(trunc(random(x) * 101))

end;

writeln

end.

The ﬁrst line identiﬁes the version of the compiler you are using. The next line

gives the modiﬁcation time of the ﬁle being compiled. The remainder of the

listing is the source program.

-Ldirectory

The -Ldirectory option adds directory to the ldlibrary search path for ld.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-libmieee

–libmil

Forces IEEE 754 style return values for math routines in exceptional cases. In

such cases, no exception message is printed, and errnois not set.

The –libmiloption instructs the compiler to select the best inline templates

for the ﬂoating-point option and operating system release available on this

system.

–llib

The –llib option links ld(1) with the object library, lib.

Do not use the -lucboption because Pascal is not compatible with the object

library, libucb.

–misalign

The –misalignoption allows for misaligned data in memory. Use this option

only if you receive a warning message that your data is misaligned.

With the –misalignoption, pcgenerates much slower code for references to

formal parameters. If possible, recode the indicated section instead of

recompiling your program with this option.

-mt

The -mtoption uses multithread-safe libraries, eliminates conﬂicts between

threads, so that Pascal library routines can be safely used in a multiprocessing

environment.

The MT-safe library for Pascal is called libpc_mt.

On a single-processor system, the code that is generated with this option runs

more slowly; the degradation in performance is usually insigniﬁcant, however.

Refer to the Multithreaded Programming Guide in the Solaris documentation for

more information.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–native

The –nativeoption causes pcto generate code for the best ﬂoating-point

hardware available on the machine you are compiling on.

The -fastmacro includes -nativein its expansion.

(Solaris 2.x only) This option is a synonym for -xtarget=native.

-nocx

(Solaris 1.x only) The -nocxoption makes the output executable ﬁle about

128K bytes smaller by not linking with the -lcxoption. However, the

runtime performance and accuracy of binary-decimal base conversion is

somewhat compromised.

-nolib

The -noliboption instructs the compiler not to link any libraries by

default—that is, no -loptions are passed to ld. Normally, the pcdriver

passes -lcto ld.

When you use -nolib, pass all -loptions yourself. For example, the

following command links libmstatically and the other libraries dynamically:

hostname% pc -nolib -Bstatic -lm -Bdynamic -lc test.p

–nolibmil

The –nolibmiloption instructs the compiler to reset –fastso that it does not

include inline templates. Use this option after the –fastoption, as in:

hostname% pc –fast –nolibmil myprog.p

-noqueue

The -noqueueoption instructs the compiler not to queue this compilation if a

license is not available. Under normal circumstances, if no license is available,

the compiler waits until one becomes available. With this option, the compiler

returns immediately.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-notrace

The -notraceoption disables runtime traceback. It is only effective when

compiling the main program.

–O[level]

The –Ooption instructs the compiler to run the compiled program through the

object code optimizer. The –Ooption also calls the –Poption, which ensures

booleanexpressions are only evaluated as much as needed to determine the

result. This process causes an increase in compile time in exchange for a

decrease in compiled code size and execution time.

There are four levels of optimization. You indicate the level by specifying a

digit from 1 to 4 after the –Ooption. If you leave out the digit, the

optimization level defaults to –O2.

The level numbers are interpreted as follows:

–O

This is the most likely level of optimization to give fastest performance

for most reasonable applications. The default is –O2.

–O1,-xO1

This is the minimum amount of optimization (peephole) and is postpass

assembly-level. Do not use –O1unless -O2and -O3result in excessive

compilation time or shortage of swap space.

–O2, -xO2

This is the basic local and global optimization—induction-variable

elimination, local and global common subexpression elimination,

algebraic simpliﬁcation, copy propagation, constant propagation, loop-

invariant optimization, register allocation, control-ﬂow optimization,

tail-recursion elimination, dead-code elimination, and tail-call

elimination.

Level -O2does not optimize references to or deﬁnitions of external or

indirect variables. This level is the appropriate level for device drivers

and programs that modify external variables from within signal

handlers.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–O3, -xO3

Same as -O2, but optimizes the uses and deﬁnitions of external variables.

Level -O3does not trace the effects of pointer assignments. Do not use

Level -O3when compiling device drivers or programs that modify

external variables from within signal handlers.

–O4, -xO3

Same as -O3, but traces the effects of pointer assignments and gathers

alias information. Do not use Level -O4when compiling device drivers

or programs that modify external variables from within signal handlers.

-O5, -xO5

(Solaris 2.x only) Generates the highest level of optimization. This level

uses optimization algorithms that take more compilation time or that do

not have as high a certainty of improving execution time.

Optimization at this level is more likely to improve performance if it is

done with proﬁle feedback. See -xprofile.

Note – Levels -O3and -O4may result in an increase in the size of the

executables. When optimizing for size, use level -O2. For most programs,

–O4is faster than –O3, which is faster than –O2, which is faster than –O1.

However, in a few cases –O2may be faster than the others, and –O3may be

faster than –O4. You can try compiling with each level to see if you have one

of these rare cases.

If the optimizer runs out of memory, it tries to recover by retrying the current

procedure at a lower level of optimization, then resumes subsequent

procedures at the original level speciﬁed in the –Ocommand-line option.

If you optimize at –O3or –O4with very large procedures (thousands of lines of

code in a single procedure), the optimizer may require an unreasonable

amount of memory. Such cases may result in degraded machine performance.

You can prevent this from happening in the C shell by limiting the amount of

virtual memory available to a single process. To do this, use the limit

command (see csh(1)).

For example, to limit virtual memory to 16 megabytes:

hostname% limit datasize 16M

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This command causes the optimizer to try to recover if it reaches 16 megabytes

of data space.

This limit cannot be greater than the machine’s total available swap space, and

in practice, should be small enough to permit normal use of the machine while

a large compilation is in progress. For example, on a machine with 32

megabytes of swap space, the command limit datasize 16Mensures that

a single compilation never consumes more than half of the machine’s swap

space.

The best setting of data size depends on the degree of optimization requested

and the amount of real memory and virtual memory available. To ﬁnd the

actual swap space:

hostname% /usr/sbin/swap -s

To ﬁnd the actual real memory:

hostname% /usr/sbin/prtconf | grep Memory

–oﬁlename

The –ooption instructs the compiler to name the generated executable,

ﬁlename. The default ﬁle name for executable ﬁles is a.out; for object ﬁles, it

is the source ﬁle name with a .oextension. For example, the following

command stores the executable in the ﬁle, myprog:

hostname% pc -o myprog myprog.p

If you use this option with the -coption, the name you give is used as the

name for the object ﬁle. The default ﬁle name for object ﬁles is the source ﬁle

name with a .oextension. You cannot give the object ﬁle the same name as

the source ﬁle.

–P

The –Poption causes the compiler to use partial evaluation semantics on the

booleanoperators, andand or. Left-to-right evaluation is guaranteed, and

the second operand is evaluated only if necessary to determine the result.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–pand –pg

The –pand –pgoptions instruct the compiler to produce code that counts the

number of times each routine is called. The proﬁling is based on a periodic

sample taken by the system, rather than by line counters.

Using the -pOption

To generate an execution proﬁle using the –poption:

1. Compile with the –poption.

2. Run a.out, which produces a mon.outexecutable ﬁle.

3. Type prof a.out. The program prints a proﬁle.

Using the -pgOption

To generate an execution proﬁle using the –pgoption:

1. Compile with the –pgoption.

2. Run a.out, which produces a gmon.outexecutable ﬁle, a more

sophisticated proﬁling tool than mon.out.

3. Type gprof a.out. The program prints a proﬁle.

–pic, -Kpicand –PIC, -KPIC

The -picand -PICoptions cause the compiler to generate position-

independent code (PIC). One of these options should be used for objects

which are then put into shared libraries. With PIC, each reference to a global

datum is generated as a dereference of a pointer in the global offset table. Each

function call is generated in pc-relative addressing mode through a procedure

linkage table.

The size of the global offset table is limited to 8Kbytes with -pic. The -PIC

option expands the global offset table to handle 32-bit addresses for those rare

cases where there are too many data objects for -pic.

For more information on PIC, see the section on shared libraries in the Solaris

documentation.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–Qoption

The –Qoptionpasses an option to the program. The option value must be

appropriate to that program and can begin with a plus or minus sign. The

program value can be either as(1) (Solaris 1.x only), fbe(1) (Solaris 2.x only),

cpp(1), cppas, inline(1), iropt, ld(1), pc0, or pc3. For example, the

following command passes the option -Rto cppand allows recursive macros:

hostname% pc -Qoption cpp -R myprog.p

–Qpathpathname

The –Qpathoption inserts a path name into the compilation search path, hence

providing an alternate path to search for each compiler component. You can

select this option, for instance, to use a different linker or assembler. In the

following command, pcsearches /home/pascal/sparcfor the compiler

components and uses them if it ﬁnds them; if pcdoes not ﬁnd the speciﬁed

components, it uses the default components:

hostname% pc -Qpath /home/pascal/sparc testp.p

–Qproduce

The –Qproduceoption instructs pcto produce source code of the type

sourcetype, which can be one of the following:

Object ﬁle from as(1)

.pi

Preprocessed Pascal source from cpp(1)

Assembler source. This option is the same as the -Soption.

For example, the following command produces the ﬁle, hello.s:

hostname% pc -Qproduce .s hello.p

-qp

The -qpoption is the same as -poption.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-R

(Solaris 1.x only) The –Roption instructs pcto call the assembler, as(1). This

option merges the data segment of the resulting program with the text

segment. See also -xMerge(Solaris 2.x only).

-Rpath[:dir]

(Solaris 2.x only) The -Rpath[:dir]option passes a colon-separated list of

directories that specify the library search path used by the runtime linker. If

present and not null, it is recorded in the output object ﬁle and passed to the

runtime linker.

If both LD_RUN_PATHand the -Roption are speciﬁed, the -Roption takes

precedence.

-Rw

The -Rwoption checks and issues warnings on record ﬁelds which are used,

but not set.

By default, the Pascal compiler generates warnings of this kind for whole

variables, but not for ﬁelds.

This option works only for local record variables that are deﬁned in procedures

or functions, not for global variables, that is, variables that are in the main

program or in a separately compiled module. This is because global variables

may appear to be initialized not in the main program itself, but in some

procedure or function that is compiled separately, which is subsequently

linked to the executable program.

This option is suppressed when the -Zoption is on. See “–Z” on page 66. In

this case, all local variables and their components are initialized by zero values.

When this option is on, the compiler performs a full analysis (as far as possible

at compile time) of how record ﬁelds are assigned and used. Warnings contain

full access constructs for ﬁelds which are used, but not set, for example,

V.F1.F2^.F3.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The compiler issues warnings at the end of the procedure where the record

variables are deﬁned, that is, when some of the ﬁelds are deﬁnitely not set.

However, no warnings are issued if ﬁelds are used in the source before they are

initialized, as the control ﬂow may be different.

In some cases, it is not possible to determine at compile time whether the ﬁelds

have actually been initialized. For example:

• For the array variable V, whose elements are records, if any assignment of

the kind V[i]:= X or V[i].F:= Yoccurs, the compiler considers the

corresponding ﬁelds of V[i]for all values of ito be initialized. If such a

ﬁeld is used, but not set, it is denoted as V[...].Fin the warning message.

• All formal parameters are assumed to be initialized. Consequently, the

compiler does not perform any checking for these component ﬁelds.

With the -Rwoption, the compiler takes into account built-in procedures which

initialize their argument variables, for example, reset(f)for the ﬁle buffer

variable f^and its components. rewrite(f)does not initialize f^. The

compiler also examines ﬁeld handling inside WITHstatements.

Use the -Rwoption to check the use of “unsafe” variant records, such as the

assignment of a variant to a ﬁeld, or the use of another ﬁeld from a “parallel”

variant. These practices may result in runtime errors which are hard to ﬁnd.

Note – The -Rwoption requires extra compile-time, and is, therefore,

recommended for use in debugging only.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Examples:

The Pascal main program, r.p

program p;

(record and array of records)

procedure qq;

type compl = record re, im: integer end;

arc = array[1..2] of compl;

var z: compl;

a: arc;

begin

writeln(z.im);

writeln(a[1].re);

end;

begin

end.

The commands to compile r.p

and the -Rwwarnings that are

issued

hostname% pc -Rw r.p

Fri Jan 27 17:35:50 1995 r.p:

In procedure qq:

w 18280 field z.im is used but never set

w 18280 field a[...].re is used but never set

The Pascal main program,

program p;

rr.p (two records)

type r = record a,b: integer end;

procedure qq;

var r1, r2: r;

var i: integer;

begin

i:=r1.a;

i:=r2.a;

i:=r1.b;

i:=r2.b;

end;

begin

qq;

end.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile

rr.p and the -Rwwarnings

that are issued

hostname% pc -Rw rr.p

Mon Feb 20 14:59:04 1995 pas/rr.p:

In procedure qq:

w 18280 field r1.b is used but never set

w 18280 field r1.a is used but never set

w 18280 field r2.b is used but never set

w 18280 field r2.a is used but never set

The Pascal main program,

recvar.p (variant record)

program p;

procedure qq;

type r = record

x,y: integer;

case integer of

0:(a: integer);

1: (b: char);

end;

var v: r;

begin

v.x:= 1;

writeln(v.y);

end;

begin

qq;

end.

The commands to compile

recvar.p

hostname% pc -Rw recvar.p

Mon Feb 20 15:55:18 1995 recvar.p:

In procedure qq:

w 18260 field v.a is neither used nor set

w 18260 field v.b is neither used nor set

w 18280 field v.y is used but never set

hostname% a.out

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Pascal main program,

program p;

with.p (withstatement)

type C = record re, im: integer end;

AC = array[1..2] of C;

RC = record C1, C2: C end;

PRC = ^RC;

procedure qq;

var

c: C;

ac: AC;

rc: RC;

prc: PRC;

begin

ac[1]:= c;

with ac[1] do

begin

re:= 1;

writeln(im);

end;

with prc^.C1 do

begin

writeln(im);

end;

begin

qq;

end.

The commands to compile and

hostname% pc -Rw with.p

execute with.p

Mon Feb 20 16:28:34 1995 with.p:

In procedure qq:

w 18280 variable c is used but never set

w 18260 variable rc is neither used nor set

w 18280 field prc^.C1.im is used but never set

hostname% a.out

*** a.out terminated by signal 11: segmentation violation

*** Traceback being written to a.out.trace

Abort (core dumped)

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–S

The –Soption compiles the program and outputs the assembly language in the

ﬁle, sourceﬁle.s. For example, the following command places the assembly

language translation of rmc.pin the ﬁle rmc.s. No executable ﬁle is created.

hostname% pc –S rmc.p

–s[level]

The –soption instructs the compiler to accept standard Pascal only. Pascal has

two levels of compliance with standard Pascal: Level 0 and Level 1. The only

difference between the two is that Level 1 also allows conformant arrays.

Specify the level of compliance as follows:

• –s0

Accept Level 0 compliance with standard Pascal

Accept Level 1 compliance with standard Pascal

• -sor –s1

This option causes many features of Pascal that are not found in standard

Pascal to be diagnosed with warning messages. These features include:

• Nonstandard procedures and functions

• Extensions to the procedure write

• Padding of constant strings with blanks

• Preprocessor directives

In addition, all letters, except character strings and constants, are mapped to

lowercase. Thus, the case of keywords and identiﬁers is ignored.

This option is most useful when a program is to be ported to other machines.

The –sboption produces a database for source browsing.

–sb

–sbfast

The –sbfastoption performs the same task as -sb, but does not compile.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-tc

The -tcoption instructs the compiler to generate pc3stab information that

allows cross-module type checking.

This option can be used for two purposes:

• To check for any name conﬂicts that your program may have with the

standard libraries with which it is to be linked, such as libc. The linker

allows name conﬂicts, which may cause erroneous runtime behavior in your

program.

For example, the following program has a name conﬂict with libc:

program p(output);

var time: integer;

begin

writeln(wallclock);

end.

When the program is compiled with the -tcoption, pc3issues a warning

that the name timeis already deﬁned as a libcroutine. Running a.out

causes a core dump. To avoid this problem, change the name of the variable

that has the conﬂict—in this case, time.

• To check for possible name conﬂicts in the various modules of your

program. These conﬂicts arise if you deﬁne a routine with the same name in

several modules, or refer to an external, but undeﬁned, variable. The linker

detects these error situations and does not create the executable ﬁle.

–temp=dir

The –tempoption instructs pcto locate the temporary ﬁles that it creates

during compilation in the directory named dir. For example, the following

command puts the temporary ﬁles in the current directory.

hostname% pc -temp=. hello.p

If you do not specify a temporary directory, pcplaces the temporary ﬁles in

the /tmpdirectory.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–time

The –timeoption instructs the compiler to report execution performance

statistics for the various compilation passes. Here is some sample output;

some spaces have been removed so the output would ﬁt on the page.

hostname% pc -time hello.p

cpp:time U:0.0s+S:0.1s=0.2s REAL:1.6s 11%. core T:0k D:0k. io IN:4b OUT:3b. pf IN:25p OUt:184p.

pc0:time U:0.0s+S:0.3s=0.4s REAL:3.2s 13%. core T:0k D:4k. io IN:4b OUT:4b. pf IN:70pOUT:131p.

cg: time U:0.0s+S:0.1s=0.2s REAL:2.0s 12%. core T:0k D:1k. io IN:2b OUT:1b. pf IN:39p OUT:163p.

as: time U:0.0s+S:0.2s=0.3s REAL:1.5s 19%. core T:0k D:1k. io IN:3b OUT:10b.pf IN:33pOUT:117p.

pc3:time U:0.1s+S:0.1s=0.3s REAL:0.9s 31%. core T:0k D:1k. io IN:7b OUT:0b. pf IN:20pOUT:109p.

ld:time U:0.8s+S:0.9s=1.8sREAL:10.2s 17%. core T:0k D:21k.io IN:74bOUT:29b.pf IN:89pOUT:184p.

Each line begins with the name of the compiler pass. The rest of the line is

divided into four parts: time, core, io, and pf.

• timegives the time used by that pass of the compiler, in this order:

a. User time

b. System time

c. Total CPU time, which is the sum of user and system time

d. Real (clock) time

e. Percent of real time used by CPU time

• coregives memory usage statistics for the pass, in this order:

a. The ﬁrst item is always 0, and currently has no meaning.

b. The second item is the integral resident set size.

• The iosection gives the volume of input and output operations, expressed

in blocks.

• The pfsection gives the amount of page faults, expressed in pages, in this

order:

a. Page faults not requiring physical I/ O

b. Page faults requiring physical I/ O

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–Uname

The –Uoption removes any initial deﬁnition of the cpp(1) symbol name. See

cpp(1) for more information. You cannot use this option with the -xloption.

–V

The –Voption prints the version number of each compilation pass.

–V0and –V1

The –V0and –V1options turn on sets of options that insert checks into the

object ﬁle, as follows:

–V0

–V1

Equivalent to -C, -H, -L, and -s0

Equivalent to –C, –H, –L, and –s1

–v

–w

The –v(verbose) option prints the command line used to call each compilation

pass.

By default, the compiler prints warnings about inconsistencies it ﬁnds in the

input program. The –woption turns off the warnings.

To turn off warnings in a program comment, use this command:

hostname% {$w-}

-xa

Same as -a.

-xarch=a

(Solaris 2.x only) The -xarch=a option limits the set of instructions the

compiler may use.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

a must be one of: generic, v7, v8, v8a, v8plus, v8plusa.

Although this option can be used alone, it is part of the expansion of the

xtargetoption; its primary use is to override a value supplied by the

xtarget option.

This option limits the instructions generated to those of the speciﬁed

architecture, and allows the speciﬁed set of instructions. It does not guarantee

an instruction is used; however, under optimization, it is usually used.

If this option is used with optimization, the appropriate choice can provide

good performance of the executable on the speciﬁed architecture. An

inappropriate choice can result in serious degradation of performance.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

v7, v8,and v8aare all binary compatible. v8plus and v8plusaare binary

compatible with each other and forward, but not backward. For any particular

choice, the generated executable can run much more slowly on earlier

architectures (to the left in the above list).

Table 3-3 The -xarchValues

Value

Meaning

generic Get good performance on most SPARCs, and major degradation on none.

This is the default. This option uses the best instruction set for good

performance on most SPARC processors without major performance

degradation on any of them. With each new release, this best instruction

set will be adjusted, if appropriate.

Limit the instruction set to V7 architecture.

This option uses the best instruction set for good performance on the V7

architecture, but without the quad-precision ﬂoating-point instructions.

This is equivalent to using the best instruction set for good performance

on the V8 architecture, but without the following instructions:

The quad-precision ﬂoating-point instructions

The integer muland divinstructions

The fsmuldinstruction

Examples: SPARCstation 1, SPARCstation 2

v8a

Limit the instruction set to the V8a version of the V8 architecture.

This option uses the best instruction set for good performance on the V8

architecture, but without:

The quad-precision ﬂoating-point instructions

The fsmuldinstruction

Example: Any machine based on MicroSPARC I chip architecture

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-3 The -xarchValues (Continued)

Value

Meaning

Limit the instruction set to V8 architecture.

This option uses the best instruction set for good performance on the V8

architecture, but without quad-precision ﬂoating-point instructions.

Example: SPARCstation 10

v8plus

Limit the instruction set to the V8plus version of the V9 architecture.

By deﬁnition, V8plus, or V8+, means the V9 architectue, except:

Without the quad-precision ﬂoating point instructions

Limited to the 32-bit subset deﬁned by the V8+ speciﬁcation

Without the VIS instructions

This option uses the best instruction set for good performance on the V9

architecture. In V8+, a system with the 64-bit registers of V9 runs in 32-bit

addressing mode, but the upper 32 bits of the i and l registers must not

affect program results.

Example: Any machine based on UltraSPARC chip architecture.

Use of this option also causes the .oﬁle to be marked as a Sun-speciﬁc

V8+ binary; such ﬁles will not run on a v7or v8machine.

v8plusa Limit the instruction set to the V8plusa version of the V9 architecture.

By deﬁntion, V8plusa means the V8plus arcitecture, plus:

The UltraSPARC-speciﬁc instructions

The VIS instructions

This option uses the best instruction set for good performance on the

UltraSPARC™ architecture but limited to the 32-bit subset deﬁned by the

V8+ speciﬁcation.

Example: Any machine based on UltraSPARC chip architecture.

Use of this option also causes the .oﬁle to be marked as a Sun-speciﬁc

V8+ binary; such ﬁles will not run on a v7 or v8 machine.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-xcache=c

(Solaris 2.x only) The -xcache=c option deﬁnes the cache properties for use by

the optimizer.

c must be one of the following:

• generic

• s1/l1/a1

• s1/l1/a1:s2/l2/a2

• s1/l1/a1:s2/l2/a2:s3/l3/a3

The si/li/ai are deﬁned as follows:

The size of the data cache at level i, in kilobytes

The line size of the data cache at level i, in bytes

The associativity of the data cache at level i

Although this option can be used alone, it is part of the expansion of the -

target option; its primary use is to override a value supplied by the -

targetoption.

This option speciﬁes the cache properties that the optimizer can use. It does not

guarantee that any particular cache property is used.

Table 3-4 The -xcacheValues

Value

Meaning

generic

Deﬁne the cache properties for good performance on most SPARCs.

This is the default value which directs the compiler to use cache properties for good

performance on most SPARC processors, without major performance degradation on any

of them.

With each new release, these best timing properties will be adjusted, if appropriate.

Deﬁne level 1 cache properties.

s1/l1/a1

s1/l1/a1:s2/l2/a2

s1/l1/a1:s2/l2/a2:s3/l3/a3

Deﬁne levels 1 and 2 cache properties.

Deﬁne levels 1, 2, and 3 cache properties

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example: -xcache=16/32/4:1024/32/1speciﬁes the following:

Level 1 cache has:

16K bytes

Level 2 cache has:

1024K bytes

32 bytes line size

4-way associativity

32 bytes line size

Direct mapping associativity

-xchip=c

(Solaris 2.x only) The -xchip=c option speciﬁes the target processor for use by

the optimizer.

c must be one of: generic, old, super, super2, micro, micro2, hyper,

hyper2, powerup, ultra

Although this option can be used alone, it is part of the expansion of the -

targetoption; its primary use is to provide a value supplied by the -target

option.

This option speciﬁes timing properties by specifying the target processor.

Some effects are:

• The ordering of instructions, that is, scheduling

• The way the compiler uses branches

• The instructions to use in cases where semantically equivalent

alternatives are available

Table 3-5 The -xchipValues

Value

Meaning

generic Use timing properties for good performance on most SPARCs.

This is the default value that directs the compiler to use the best timing

properties for good performance on most SPARC processors, without

major performance degradation on any of them.

old

Use timing properties of pre-SuperSPARC™ processors.

Use timing properties of the SuperSPARC chip.

Use timing properties of the SuperSPARC II chip.

Use timing properties of the MicroSPARC™ chip.

super

super2

micro

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-5 The -xchipValues (Continued)

Value

Meaning

micro2

hyper

hyper2

Use timing properties of the MicroSPARC II chip.

Use timing properties of the HyperSPARC™ chip.

Use timing properties of the HyperSPARC II chip.

powerup Use timing properties of the Weitek PowerUp™ chip.

ultra

Use timing properties of the UltraSPARC chip.

-xcg89

-xcg92

–xF

Same as -cg89.

Same as -cg92.

(Solaris 2.x only) The –xFoption enables performance analysis of the executable

ﬁle using the SPARCworks Performance Analyzer and Debugger. This option

also causes the assembler to generate some debugging information in the

object ﬁle, necessary for data collection. The compiler generates code that can

be reordered at the function level. It takes each function in the ﬁle and places

it into a separate section. For example, functions fcn1()and fcn2()are

placed in the sections .text%fcn1and .text%fcn2. You can control the

order of functions in the ﬁnal executable by using the –xFand the loader

–Mmapfileoptions.

In the map ﬁle, if you include the ﬂag Oin the string of segment ﬂags, then the

static linker ldattempts to place sections in the order they appear in the map

ﬁle. See the Solaris documentation for details about this option, the segment

ﬂags, and the map ﬁle.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-xildoff

-xildon

–xl

(Solaris 2.x only) Turns off the incremental linker and forces the use of ld. This

option is the default if you do not use the -goption, or you do not use the -G

option, or any source ﬁles are present on the command line. Override this

default by using the -xildonoption.

(Solaris 2.x only) Turns on the incremental linker and forces the use of ildin

incremental mode. This option is the default if you use the -goption, and you

do not use the -Goption, and there are no source ﬁles present on the command

line. Override this default by using the -xildoffoption.

The –xloption implements a set of features that provide broad compatibility

with Apollo Pascal. We recommend using –xlonly when porting Pascal

systems from Apollo platforms to SPARC system platforms. See the Pascal 4.0

Reference Manual for details of the features controlled by -xl.

When you use -xl, the compiler invokes the cppaspreprocessor in place of

cpp(1). See Appendix A, “Pascal Preprocessor,” for information on cppas.

Modules compiled with –xlare not compatible with modules compiled

without –xl. You should not link these two types of modules together.

-xlibmieee

Same as -libmieee.

-xlibmil

Same as -libmil.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-xlibmopt

–xlicinfo

Uses a math routine library optimized for performance. The results may be

slightly different than those produced by the normal math library. This option

is implied by the -fastoption.

The -xlicinfooption returns information about the licensing system. In

particular, it returns the name of the license server and the IDs of users who

have licenses checked out. When you give this option, the compiler is not

invoked and a license is not checked out.

–xMerge

-xnolib

(Solaris 2.x only) The –xMergeoption instructs pcto call the assembler, as(1),

with the –Roption. This option merges the data segment of the resulting

program with the text segment. See also -R(Solaris 1.x only).

Same as -nolib.

-xnolibmopt

Resets -fast, and does not use the math routine library.

Use this option after the -fastoption on the command-line, as in:

pc -fast -xnolibmopt ....

-x05

Optimizes the object code.

(Solaris 2.x) This option can be combined with –g, but not with –xa.

When -Ois used with the -goption, a limited amount of debugging is

available.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Generates the highest level of optimization. Uses optimization algorithms that

take more compilation time or that do not have as high a certainty of

improving execution time. Optimization at this level is more likely to improve

performance if it is done with proﬁle feedback. See -xprofile=p.

If the optimizer runs out of memory, it tries to recover by retrying the current

procedure at a lower level of optimization and resumes subsequent procedures

at the original level speciﬁed in the command-line option.

-xpg

Same as -pand -pg

-xprofile=p

(Solaris 2.x only) The -xprofile=p option collects data for a proﬁle or use a

proﬁle to optimize.

p must be collect, use[:name], or tcov.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This option causes execution frequency data to be collected and saved during

execution, then the data can be used in subsequent runs to improve

performance.

Table 3-6 The -xprofileValues

Value

Meaning

collect Collect and save execution frequency for later use by the optimizer.

The compiler inserts code to measure the execution frequency at a low

level. During execution, the measured frequency data is written into

.profﬁles that correspond to each of the source ﬁles.

If you run the program several times, the execution frequency data

accumulates in the .profﬁles; that is, output from prior runs is not lost.

use

Use execution frequency data saved by the compiler.

Optimize by using the execution frequency data previously generated

and saved in the .profﬁles by the compiler.

The source ﬁles and the compiler options (excepting only this option),

must be exactly the same as for the compilation used to create the

compiled program that was executed to create the .profﬁles.

tcov

Correctly collects data for programs that have source code in header ﬁles

or make use of C++ templates. See -afor information on the old style of

proﬁling, the tcov(1) man page, and the Proﬁling Tools manual for more

details.

Code instrumentation is performed similarly to that of -a, but .dﬁles

are no longer generated. Instead, a single ﬁle is generated, whose name is

based off of the ﬁnal executable. For example, if the program is run out

of /foo/bar/myprog, then the data ﬁle is stored in

/foo/bar/myprog.profile/myprog.tcovd.

When running tcov, you must pass it the -xoption to make it use the

new style of data. If not, tcovuses the old .dﬁles, if any, by default for

data, and produces unexpected output.

Unlike -a, the TCOVDIRenvironment variable has no effect at compile-

time. However, its value is used at program runtime.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-xregs=r

(Solaris 2.x only) The -xregs=r option speciﬁes the usage of registers for the

generated code.

r is a comma-separated list that consists of one or more of the following:

[no%]appl, [no%]float.

Example: -xregs=appl,no%float

Table 3-7 The -xregsValues

Value

Meaning

appl

Allow using the registers g2, g3, and g4.

In the SPARC ABI, these registers are described as application registers.

Using these registers can increase performance because fewer load and

store instructions are needed. However, such use can conﬂict with some

old library programs written in assembly code.

no%appl

float

Do not use the applregisters.

Allow using the ﬂoating-point registers as speciﬁed in the SPARC ABI.

You can use these registers even if the program contains no ﬂoating-

point code.

no%float Do not use the ﬂoating-point registers.

With this option, a source program cannot contain any ﬂoating-point

code.

The default is -xregs=appl,float.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–xs

(Solaris 2.x only) The -xsoption disables Auto-Read for dbxin case you

cannot keep the .oﬁles around. This option passes the -soption to the

assembler and the linker.

• No Auto-Read—This is the older way of loading symbol tables.

• The compiler instructs the linker to place all symbol tables for dbxin the

executable ﬁle.

• The linker links more slowly and dbxinitializes more slowly.

• If you move the executables to another directory, then to use dbxyou

must move the source ﬁles, but you need not move the object (.o) ﬁles.

• Auto-Read—This is the newer (and default) way of loading symbol tables.

• The compiler distributes this information in the .oﬁles so that dbxloads

the symbol table information only if and when it is needed.

• The linker links faster and dbxinitializes faster.

• If you move the executables to another directory, then to use dbx, you

must move both the source ﬁles and the object (.o) ﬁles.

-xsafe=mem

(Solaris 2.x only) The -xsafe=memoption allows the compiler to assume no

memory-based traps occur.

This option grants permission to use the speculative load instruction on V9

machines.

-xsb

Same as -sb.

-xsbfast

Same as -sbfast.

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-xspace

(Solaris 2.x only) The -xspaceoption does no optimizations that increase the

code size.

Example: Do not unroll loops.

-xtarget=t

(Solaris 2.x only) The -xtarget=t option speciﬁes the target system for the

instruction set and optimization.

t must be one of: native, generic, system-name.

The -xtargetoption permits a quick and easy speciﬁcation of the -xarch,

-xchip, and -xcachecombinations that occur on real systems. The only

meaning of -xtargetis in its expansion.

Table 3-8 The -xtargetValues

Value

Meaning

native

Get the best performance on the host system.

The compiler generates code for the best performance on the host

system. It determines the available architecture, chip, and cache

properties of the machine on which the compiler is running.

generic

Get the best performance for generic architecture, chip, and cache.

The compiler expands -xtarget=genericto:

-xarch=generic-xchip=generic-xcache=generic

This is the default value.

system-name

Get the best performance for the speciﬁed system.

You select a system name from Table 3-9 that lists the mnemonic

encodings of the actual system names and numbers.

The performance of some programs may beneﬁt by providing the compiler

with an accurate description of the target computer hardware. When program

performance is critical, the proper speciﬁcation of the target hardware could be

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

very important. This is especially true when running on the newer SPARC

processors. However, for most programs and older SPARC processors, the

performance gain is negligible and a generic speciﬁcation is sufﬁcient.

Each speciﬁc value for -xtargetexpands into a speciﬁc set of values for the -

xarch, -xchip, and -xcacheoptions. See Table 3-9 for the values. For

example:

-xtarget=sun4/15is equivalent to:

-xarch=v8a -xchip=micro -xcache=2/16/1

Table 3-9 -xtargetExpansions

-xtarget

sun4/15

sun4/20

sun4/25

sun4/30

sun4/40

sun4/50

sun4/60

sun4/65

sun4/75

sun4/110

sun4/150

sun4/260

sun4/280

sun4/330

sun4/370

sun4/390

sun4/470

sun4/490

sun4/630

-xarch

v8a

-xchip

micro

old

-xcache

2/16/1

64/16/1

64/32/1

2/16/1

old

v8a

micro

old

64/16/1

64/32/1

64/16/1

64/32/1

2/16/1

old

2/16/1

old

128/16/1

128/32/1

64/32/1

old

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-xtarget

sun4/670

sun4/690

sselc

-xarch

-xchip

old

-xcache

64/32/1

64/16/1

64/32/1

2/16/1

old

ssipc

old

ssipx

old

sslc

v8a

micro

old

sslt

64/32/1

2/16/1

sslx

v8a

micro

micro2

old

sslx2

8/64/1

ssslc

64/16/1

64/32/1

64/31/1

8/64/1

ss1

old

ss1plus

ss2

old

ss2p

powerup

micro2

super

hyper

super

hyper

super

ss4

v8a

ss5

8/64/1

ssvyger

ss10

8/64/1

16/32/4

256/64/1

16/32/4

256/64/1

16/32/4

16/32/4:1024/32/1

16/32/4

ss10/hs11

ss10/hs12

ss10/hs14

ss10/20

ss10/hs21

ss10/hs22

ss10/30

ss10/40

ss10/41

ss10/50

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-xtarget

ss10/51

-xarch

-xchip

super

super2

super

super2

hyper

super

super2

super

old

-xcache

16/32/4:1024/32/1

16/32/4

ss10/61

ss10/71

ss10/402

ss10/412

ss10/512

ss10/514

ss10/612

ss10/712

ss20/hs11

ss20/hs12

ss20/hs14

ss20/hs21

ss20/hs22

ss20/51

16/32/4:1024/32/1

256/64/1

16/32/4:1024/32/1

16/32/4

ss20/61

ss20/71

ss20/91

ss20/502

ss10/512

ss20/514

ss20/612

ss20/712

ss20/912

ss600/41

ss600/51

ss600/61

ss600/120

16/32/4:1024/32/1

64/32/1

The Pascal Compiler

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-xtarget

ss600/140

ss600/412

ss600/

-xarch

-xchip

old

-xcache

64/32/1

super

old

16/32/4:1024/32/1

16/32/4:1024/64/1

16/32/4:2048/64/1

128/32/1

ss600/

ss1000

sc2000

cs6400

solb5

solb6

super

ultra

16/32/4:1024/32/1

16/32/1:512/64/1

16/32/1:1024/64/1

ultra

ultra1/140

ultra1/170

ultra1/1170

ultra1/2170

ultra1/2200

–Z

The –Zoption instructs pcto insert code that initializes all local variables to

zero. Standard Pascal does not allow initialization of variables.

-ztext

(Solaris 2.x only) The -ztextoption forces a fatal error if relocations remain

against non-writable, allocatable sections.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ProgramConstruction and

Management

This chapter is an introduction to the methods generally used to construct and

manage programs using Pascal. It describes units and libraries in two separate

sections:

Units

page 67

page 74

Libraries

Units

For many reasons, it is often inconvenient to store a program in a single ﬁle, as

in the case of a very large program.

You can break up a program in several ways. Perhaps the simplest way is to

use an includeﬁle. An includeﬁle is a separate ﬁle that is copied in by the

compiler when it encounters an includecompiler directive. For example, in

the following program:

program include (output);

#include "includefile"

the line #include "includefile"is a compiler directive to cpp(1), the

Pascal compiler’s preprocessor. The directive instructs cpp(1) to ﬁnd the ﬁle

includefileand copy it into the stream before continuing.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The actual includefilelooks like this:

begin

writeln ('Hello, world.')

end.

In this example, the includeﬁle contains the entire program. In reality, an

includeﬁle probably contains a set of variable or procedure declarations.

includeﬁles are often used when a set of declarations needs to be shared

among a number of programs.

However, suppose your program is very large and takes a long time to

compile. Using includeﬁles may make editing more convenient, but when

you make a change in one part of your program, you still must recompile the

entire program. As another example, suppose you want to be able to share

compiled code with other people, but for reasons of security or convenience,

do not want to share the source code.

Both of these problems are solved by separately compiled units, generally

called units. A unit is a part of a program stored in its own ﬁle and linked

with the rest of the program after compilation.

Using Program Units and Module Units

There are two kinds of units:

• Program unit—This unit looks like any program. It begins with a program

header and contains the main program.

Here is an example:

program program_unit (output);

procedure say_hello; extern;

begin

say_hello

end.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The body of the procedure say_hellois not deﬁned in this program unit,

but the program unit does contain a declaration of the interface to the

procedure. The keyword externdeclares that say_hellois declared in a

module unit.

• Module unit—This unit can begin with an optional module header,

followed by a set of compilable declarations and deﬁnitions. Modules that

call externally deﬁned routines must have declarations for those routines.

Here is an example:

module module_unit;

procedure say_hello;

begin

writeln ('Hello, world.')

end;

Every program must have one and only one program unit; a program can have

any number of module units. Any unit can call procedures declared in any

other unit; each unit must have externaldeclarations for every procedure it

uses that is not deﬁned in that unit.

A module unit can also be used as a library, that is, as a collection of useful

routines that is shared among a number of programs.

Compiling with Units

Consider the units given in the previous section, “Using Program Units and

Module Units.” You can compile and link these units on a single line by

executing the following command, which then produces the executable,

a.out.

hostname% pc program_unit.p module_unit.p

1. A statement that shows the interface of a routine is called a declaration, because it declares the name and

parameters of the routine. The set of statements that shows the entire routine, including the body, is called

the deﬁnition of the routine. There can be only one deﬁnition for a given routine, but every routine must be

declared in every module or program unit that uses it.

Program Construction and Management

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You can also separate the compilation and linking or loading steps, as follows:

hostname% pc program_unit.p -c

hostname% pc module_unit.p -c

hostname% pc program_unit.o module_unit.o

In this case, you call pcon each unit with the “compile only” option (-c),

which produces an object ﬁle with the extension .o. When you use this

option, the compiler driver does not call the linker, ld. You then call pca

second time, giving the names of the object ﬁles, and pccalls pc3to check for

name and type conﬂicts before calling the linker.

Calling the linker or loader ld(1) directly does not have the same effect as

calling pc; when you call ld(1) directly, the ﬁles are linked and loaded, but

they are not checked for conﬂicts.

Using Units and Header Files

A complex program may have many routines deﬁned in modules. Each

routine must have a declaration (for example, procedureproc;extern;) in

each ﬁle that calls the routine. The easiest way to be sure that you have a

correct and consistent set of declarations is to create a header ﬁle.

A header ﬁle is a ﬁle that contains a set of declarations, nothing else. You use

a header ﬁle by using an includedirective to include the header ﬁle in the

compilation.

For example, here is a modiﬁed version of the program, program_unit, that

uses a header ﬁle:

program program_unit2 (output);

include "header.h"

begin

say_hello

end.

In this case, the content of header.his very simple:

procedure say_hello; extern;

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In a real program, header.hwould probably contain many declarations and

would be included in several modules. Aside from routine declarations,

header ﬁles often contain constant, type, and variable declarations.

Sharing Variables Between Units

Variables that are global across a unit (that is, not declared locally in a routine)

can be publicor private. A publicvariable can be shared by any unit that

is linked to the unit that declares the variable. A privatevariable cannot be

shared.

You can use the publicand privatereserved words to declare that a var

section declares publicor privatevariables. For example:

program program_unit3 (output);

public var

x : integer;

private var

y : integer;

When you do not use publicor private, variables are publicby default.

However, when you compile with the -xloption, variables are privateby

default.

To share a publicvariable, simply declare it in each unit where you want to

share it. As long as the variable is public, each reference to that variable

accesses the same data.

Program Construction and Management

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Here is a program unit that declares a variable:

program program_unit3 (output);

var

x : integer;

procedure say_hello; external;

begin

for x := 1 to 5 do say_hello

end.

Here is a module unit that declares a variable with the same name:

module module_unit3;

var

x : integer;

procedure say_hello;

begin

writeln ('Hello, world for the', x, ' time.')

end;

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

By default, both deﬁnitions of variable xare public. Thus, when you compile

and link the program and module units, references to xrefer to the same

variable, as follows:

hostname% pc program_unit3.p module_unit3.p

program_unit.p:

module_unit.p:

Linking:

hostname% a.out

Hello, world for the 1 time.

Hello, world for the 2 time.

Hello, world for the 3 time.

Hello, world for the 4 time.

Hello, world for the 5 time.

If you compile the program giving the -xloption, the variables are private

by default, as follows:

hostname% pc -xl program_unit.p module_unit.p

program_unit.p:

module_unit.p:

Linking:

hostname% a.out

Hello, world for the 0 time.

You can get the same effect by explicitly declaring the variable in a private

varsection. Similarly, when you use -xl, you can create publicvariables by

declaring them in a publicvarsection.

As with routine declarations, it is often a good idea to declare public

variables in an includeﬁle. Doing so makes it easier to keep your

declarations consistent.

There are other methods for making variables visible to different units. See

Chapter 5, “Separate Compilation,” for more information.

Program Construction and Management

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Libraries

You can use a module unit as a library of useful functions. The simplest way

to do so is to create a source ﬁle containing the deﬁnitions of your library

routines and then compile it using the -coption. You can then link the

resulting .oﬁle to any number of ﬁles. For convenience, you probably should

create a header ﬁle containing the routine declarations for the library.

A simple library as described above has two problems:

• When a library grows in size, it may become inconvenient to store its source

in a single ﬁle, both for ease of editing and so you can avoid recompiling a

large ﬁle when you change only part of it.

On the other hand, it would be inconvenient to have to name many library

modules on the command-line when you link your program. Thus, it would

be helpful to be able to combine a number of library modules.

• Several programs that you run at the same time may share the same library.

Under the scheme described above, each program has its own copy of the

library. It saves space and even I/ O time if several programs share library

code.

Both problems have solutions. First, you can combine or archive modules

together. Secondly, you can create a shared library.

See the Solaris documentation on the linker and libraries for information on

creating archived and shared libraries.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SeparateCompilation

This chapter describes how to compile Pascal programs in separate units.

Chapter 4, “Program Construction and Management,” gives an introduction to

the concepts in this chapter. Following are the sections:

Working with Units

page 75

page 76

page 87

Sharing Variables and Routines Across Multiple Units

Sharing Declarations in Multiple Units

In separate compilation, a program is divided into several units that can be

separately compiled into object (.o) ﬁles. The object ﬁles are then linked using

pc, which invokes pc3to check for the consistent use of global names and

declarations across the different units, and then invokes ld(1) to link and load

the units. You can also give pcthe names of all the units at once, in which case

pccompiles all the units, checks for consistency, and links the units in one

step.

Separate compilation is different from independent compilation. In

independent compilation, you invoke lddirectly, so there is no consistency

checking. Independent compilation is not addressed in this guide.

Working with Units

Pascal provides two types of source ﬁles or units: the program unit and the

module unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Program Units

The program unit is the source program with the program header. It has the

following syntax:

Each program you write can have only one program unit. The program body

is the ﬁrst code that Pascal executes.

Using Module Units

A module unit is a source program that does not have a program header. It

has the following syntax:

The module heading contains the reserved word modulefollowed by an

identiﬁer:

<module heading> ::= [ 'module' <identiﬁer> ';' ]

For example:

module sum;

This is a legal module heading. The module heading is optional.

Sharing Variables and Routines Across Multiple Units

Pascal supports three methods of sharing variables and routines between units:

• includeﬁles

• Multiple variable declarations

• extern/definevariable declarations

These methods are not mutually exclusive; for example, you can declare a

variable as either externor definein an includeﬁle.

The following sections describe these methods.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Compiling without the -xlOption

There are three ways of sharing variables and routines across units when you

compile your program without the –xloption.

Sharing Public Variables

If you declare a variable in two or more separate units and the variable is

publicin both places, that variable is shared between units. Variables are

publicby default, unless you compile with the -xloption, in which case

variables are privateby default. In this example, the variable globalis

publicby default, and thus shared between the program and the module.

The program unit,

program shrvar_prog;

shrvar_prog.p

var

global: integer;

procedure proc; external;

begin { program body }

global := 1;

writeln('From MAIN, before PROC: ', global);

proc;

writeln('From MAIN, after PROC: ', global)

end. { shrvar_prog }

Themoduleunit,shrvar_mod.p.

The assignment of a new value to

globaland max_arrayin the

procedure procin

shrvar_prog.pis repeated in

shrvar_mod.p.

module shrvar_mod;

var

global: integer;

procedure proc;

begin

writeln('From PROC: ',global);

global := global + 1

end; { proc }

Separate Compilation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute shrvar_prog.pand

shrvar_mod.p

hostname% pc shrvar_prog.p shrvar_mod.p

shrvar_prog.p:

shrvar_mod.p:

Linking:

hostname% a.out

From MAIN, before PROC: 1

From PROC

: 1

From MAIN, after PROC : 2

Using externOption to Share Routines

If a program or module calls a procedure not deﬁned in that unit, you must

declare it with either the externor externalroutine option. For instance, in

the previous example, the procedure procis deﬁned in shrvar_mod.p, but

used in shrvar_prog.p. Thus, it is declared as externalin

shrvar_prog.p. Also, procmust also be deﬁned as public in

shrvar_mod.p, which is the default.

Using includeFiles to Share Variables and Routines

The includeﬁle contains the declarations for the program. Placing all

program declarations in a single ﬁle makes your program more consistent and

easier to maintain.

To use this feature, place the number sign character (#) in the ﬁrst position of a

line immediately followed by the word include, and then a ﬁle name

enclosed in angle brackets (<and >) or double quotation marks ("). The

different enclosures (<>and "") affect the search order for ﬁles. The syntax for

the #includedirective is determined by cpp(1).

When the compiler encounters the #includein the input, it inserts the lines

from the included ﬁle into the input stream.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The program unit, inc_prog.p,

which includes the ﬁle

include.h

program inc_prog;

#include "include.h"

begin { program body}

global := 1;

writeln('From MAIN, before PROC: ', global);

proc;

writeln('From MAIN, after PROC: ', global)

end. { inc_prog }

The module unit, inc_mod.p,

which also includes the ﬁle

include.h

module inc_mod;

#include "include.h"

procedure proc;

begin

writeln('From PROC

: ', global);

global := global + 1

end; { proc }

The includeﬁle, include.h

var

global : integer;

procedure proc; extern;

The commands to compile and

execute inc_prog.pand

inc_mod.p

hostname% pc inc_prog.p inc_mod.p

inc_prog.p:

inc_mod.p:

Linking:

hostname% a.out

From MAIN, before PROC:

From PROC :

From MAIN, after PROC:

Separate Compilation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the -xlOption

When you use the –xloption, variables and top-level procedures and

functions declared in the program unit default to private. Look at the

difference when you compile and execute shrvar_prog.pand

shrvar_mod.pwith –xl. See the source code in “Sharing Public Variables”

on page 77.

The commands to compile and

execute shrvar_prog.pand

shrvar_mod.pwith the –xl

option

hostname% pc -xl shrvar_prog.p shrvar_mod.p

shrvar_prog.p:

shrvar_mod.p:

Linking:

hostname% a.out

From MAIN, before PROC: 1

From PROC : 0

From MAIN, after PROC: 1

Without –xl, the variable globalin shrvar_mod.pis treated as public;

here, globalis treated as private. Thus, the assignment:

global := global + 1;

is not reﬂected in shrvar_prog.p; instead, each ﬁle uses its own private copy

of global.

The following sections describe ﬁve ways of sharing variables and routines

across units when you compile your program with –xl.

Using public varDeclarations

The following examples uses the publicattribute in the var declaration to

make globalpublicwhen you compile your program with –xl.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The program unit,

program pubvar_prog;

pubvar_prog.p, which declares

globalas public

public var

global: integer;

procedure proc;

external;

begin

global := 1;

writeln('From MAIN, before PROC: ', global);

proc;

writeln('From MAIN, after PROC: ', global)

end. { pubvar_prog }

The module unit, pubvar_mod.p,

which also declares globalas

public

module pubvar_mod;

public var

global : integer;

procedure proc;

begin

writeln('From PROC

:',global);

global := global + 1;

end; { proc }

The commands to compile and

execute pubvar_prog.pand

pubvar_mod.p

hostname% pc -xl pubvar_prog.p pubvar_mod.p

pubvar_prog.p:

pubvar_mod.p:

Linking:

hostname% a.out

From MAIN, before PROC: 1

From PROC : 1

From MAIN, after PROC: 2

Separate Compilation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the defineVariable Attribute

This example makes globalpublicusing the deﬁne attribute of the variable

declaration.

The program unit,

program defvar_prog;

defvar_prog.p

var

global: extern integer;

procedure proc;

external;

begin

global := 1;

writeln('From MAIN, before PROC: ', global);

proc;

writeln('From MAIN, after PROC: ', global);

end. { defvar_prog }

The module unit, defvar_mod.p,

which makes globalpublic using

the defineattribute

module defvar_mod;

var

global : define integer;

procedure proc;

begin

writeln('From PROC

: ',global);

global := global + 1;

end; { proc }

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute defvar_prog.pand

defvar_mod.p

hostname% pc -xl defvar_prog.p defvar_mod.p

defvar_prog.p:

defvar_mod.p:

Linking:

hostname% a.out

From MAIN, before PROC:

From PROC

From MAIN, after PROC :

Using the defineDeclaration

This example deﬁnes globalin the module defvar_mod2using the define

declaration. The advantage of using the definedeclaration over the define

variable attribute is that the definedeclaration can be easily converted to use

includeﬁles.

The program unit,

program defvar_prog;

defvar_prog.p

var

global: extern integer;

procedure proc;

external;

begin

global := 1;

writeln('From MAIN, before PROC: ', global);

proc;

writeln('From MAIN, after PROC: ', global)

end. { defvar_prog }

Separate Compilation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The module unit,

module defvar_mod2;

defvar_mod2.p, which deﬁnes

globalin a definedeclaration

var

global : extern integer;

define

global;

procedure proc;

begin

writeln('From PROC

global := global + 1;

end; { proc }

: ',global);

The commands to compile and

execute defvar_prog.pand

defvar_mod2.p

hostname% pc -xl defvar_prog.p defvar_mod2.p

defvar_prog.p:

defvar_mod2.p:

Linking:

hostname% a.out

From MAIN, before PROC:

From PROC

From MAIN, after PROC :

Using includeFiles

In the following example, the externdeclaration for the variable globalis in

the includeﬁle, inc_prog2.p, and is therefore included in both ﬁles. The

definedeclaration in ﬁle inc_mod2.pcancels the externdeﬁnition.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The program unit, inc_prog2.p

program inc_prog2;

%include "include2.h";

procedure proc; extern;

begin

global := 1;

writeln('From MAIN, before PROC: ',global);

proc;

writeln('From MAIN, after PROC: ',global);

end. { proc }

The module unit, inc_mod2.p

module inc_mod2;

define

global;

%include "include2.h";

procedure proc;

begin

writeln('From PROC

: ',global);

global := global + 1;

end; { proc }

The includeﬁle, include2.h

var

global : extern integer;

Separate Compilation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute inc_prog2.pand

inc_mod2.p

hostname% pc -xl inc_prog2.p inc_mod2.p

inc_prog2.p:

inc_mod2.p:

Linking:

hostname% a.out

From MAIN, before PROC: 1

From PROC

: 1

From MAIN, after PROC : 2

Using extern

In the previous example, the externdeﬁnition for variables is put into an

includeﬁle and then shared. You can do the same for the externprocedure

deﬁnition. In doing so, you must also declare the variable with a define

declaration in the module that deﬁnes the procedure. This declaration nulliﬁes

the effect of the externdeclaration.

The program unit, ext_prog.p

program ext_prog;

%include "extern.h";

begin

global := 1;

writeln('From MAIN, before PROC: ',global);

proc;

writeln('From MAIN, after PROC: ',global);

end. { ext_prog }

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The module unit, ext_mod.p

module ext_mod;

define

global, proc;

%include "extern.h";

procedure proc;

begin

writeln('From PROC : ',global);

global := global + 1;

end; { proc }

The includeﬁle, extern.h

var

global : extern integer;

procedure proc; extern;

The commands to compile and

execute ext_prog.pand

ext_mod.p

hostname% pc -xl ext_prog.p ext_mod.p

ext_prog.p:

ext_mod.p:

Linking:

hostname% a.out

From MAIN, before PROC: 1

From PROC : 1

From MAIN, after PROC: 2

Sharing Declarations in Multiple Units

Using externand externaldirectives for procedure and function

declarations, you can optionally specify the source language of a separately

compiled procedure or function. For example, externfortrandirects the

compiler to generate calling sequences compatible with the FORTRAN

compiler from SunSoft. Then, externalcdirects the compiler to generate

calling sequences compatible with SunSoft C compiler.

Separate Compilation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

For routines declared externfortranor externalfortran, the changes

in the calling sequence are as follows:

• For value parameters, the compiler creates a copy of the actual argument

value in the caller’s environment and passes a pointer to the temporary

variable on the stack. Thus, you need not create (otherwise useless)

temporary variables.

• The compiler appends an underscore to the name of the external procedure

to conform to a naming convention of the f77(1) compiler. Pascal

procedure names called from FORTRAN must supply their own trailing

underscore (_).

• Multidimensional Pascal arrays are not compatible with FORTRAN arrays.

Because FORTRAN uses column-major ordering, a multidimensional

Pascal array passed to FORTRAN appears transposed.

For routines declared externcor externalc, a warning is generated if you

attempt to pass a nested function.

When you compile your program with the –xloption, you can also use

nonpascalto declare non-Pascal routines when porting DOMAIN programs

written in DOMAIN Pascal, FORTRAN, and C.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TheC–PascalInterface

This chapter describes how to mix C and Pascal modules in the same program.

It contains the following sections:

Compilation of Mixed-Language Programs

Compatibility of Types for C and Pascal

General Parameter Passing in C and Pascal

Procedure Calls: C–Pascal

page 89

page 90

page 93

page 117

page 132

page 133

page 134

Procedure Calls: Pascal–C

Procedures and Functions as Parameters

Global Variables in C and Pascal

File-Passing Between Pascal and C

The examples in this chapter assume that you are using the ANSI C compiler.

To invoke ANSI C:

• On the Solaris 1.x environment, use the acccommand

• On the Solaris 2.x environment, use the cccommand

Compilation of Mixed-Language Programs

You must use the compiler option –lpcwhen you compile a C main routine

that calls Pascal. –lpcincludes the Pascal object library libpc. For example:

hostname% pc -c -calignmy_pascal.p

hostname% cc my_pascal.omy_c.c -lpc

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The -coption produces an unlinked object ﬁle. The -calignoption causes

pcto use C-like data formats for aggregate objects.

When you compile a Pascal main routine that calls C, you don’t have to use

any special options, but the -calignoption is again useful. The C object

library, libc, is automatically brought in for every Pascal compilation.

For example:

hostname% cc -c my_c.c

hostname% pc -calign my_c.o my_pascal.p

Compatibility of Types for C and Pascal

Table 6-1 and Table 6-2 list the default sizes and alignments of compatible

types for C and Pascal.

Table 6-1 C and Pascal Size and Alignment of Compatible Types

Pascal Type

double

C Type

double

float

Size (bytes) Alignment (bytes)

longreal

real

single

shortreal

integer16

integer32

integer

-128..127

boolean

alfa

float

short int

int

char

char a[10]

char

string

char a[80]

varying[n] of char struct{int, char[n]}

record

struct/union

Same as element type

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 6-1 C and Pascal Size and Alignment of Compatible Types (Continued)

Pascal Type

array

C Type

Size (bytes) Alignment (bytes)

array

Same as element type

variant record

struct/union

bit ﬁeld

ﬁelds in packed

record

Table 6-2 C and Pascal Size and Alignment of Compatible Types with –xl

Pascal Type

real

C Type

Size (bytes) Alignment (bytes)

float

integer

short int

Precautions with Compatible Types

This section describes the precautions you should take when working with

compatible types.

The shortrealType

The Pascal shortrealand C floatcompatibility works if you pass by

reference. See “Value Parameters” on page 112 for examples that show you

how to pass by value.

Character Strings

C has several assumptions about strings. All C strings are:

• Passed by reference since C strings are arrays

• Terminated by a null byte

• Located in static variable storage

You can satisfy these assumptions as follows:

• Pass by reference by making the strings var, in, out, or inout

parameters.

• Provide the null byte explicitly before passing a string to C. Pascal

guarantees the null byte only if the string is a constant. The null byte is not

required by the ISO Pascal Standard.

The C–Pascal Interface

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Array Indexes

Pascal array indexes can start at any integer; C array indexes always start at

zero.

Aggregate Types

Aggregate types include arrays, varying arrays, sets, strings, alphas, records,

and variant records.

Pascal aggregate types may require alignment and layout adjustment to match

C unions, structures, and arrays. Pascal aggregate types can be any of the

following: arrays, varying arrays, sets, strings, alphas, records, or variant

records.

However, you can use the -calignoption to eliminate some of these

differences. With -calign, the following assumptions are made:

• Pascal records have the same data layout as C structures.

• Arrays have the same data layout in both languages. However, if you use

the -xloption in addition to -calign, booleanarrays with an odd

number of elements are different.

• Pascal variants are the same as C unions.

Incompatibilities

This section describes the incompatibilities between C and Pascal types.

Enumerated Types

C enumerated types are incompatible with Pascal enumerated types. Pascal

enumerated types are represented internally by sequences of integral values

starting with 0. Storage is allocated for a variable of an enumerated type as if

the type was a subrange of integer. For example, an enumerated type of fewer

than 128 elements is treated as 0..127, which, according to the rules above, is

equivalent to a charin C.

C enumerated types are allocated a full word and can take on arbitrary integer

values.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pascal Set Types

In Pascal, a set type is implemented as a bit vector, which is similar to a C

short-word array, where each short-word contains two bytes. Thus, sets are

bit-vectors, and they are allocated in multiples of 16 bits. To ﬁnd out the size

of a set, enter the following code:

ceiling( ord( highest_element ) / 16 )

Direct access to individual elements of a set is highly machine-dependent and

should be avoided.

General Parameter Passing in C and Pascal

A few general rules apply to parameter passing:

• C passes all arrays by reference since C strings are arrays.

• C passes all structures by value.

• In C, if you want to pass anything else by reference, then you must

explicitly prepend the reference ampersand (&), or pass an explicit pointer.

• Pascal passes all parameters by value unless you explicitly state that they

are var, in out, or outparameters, in which case they are passed by

reference.

Procedure Calls: C–Pascal

Here are examples of how a C main program calls a Pascal procedure:

The Pascal procedure, Samp, in

the ﬁle Samp.p. Note the

procedure deﬁnition.

procedure Samp(var i: integer; var r: real);

begin

i := 9;

r := 9.9

end; { Samp }

The C–Pascal Interface

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The C main program,

#include <stdio.h>

SampMain.c. Note the

procedure deﬁnition and call.

extern void Samp(int *, double *);

int main (void)

{

int

i ;

double d ;

Samp(&i, &d) ;

printf ("%d %3.1f \n", i, d) ;

}

The commands to compile and

execute Samp.pand

SampMain.c

hostname% pc -c Samp.p

hostname% cc Samp.o SampMain.c

hostname% a.out

9 9.9

Variable Parameters

Pascal passes all variable parameters by reference, which C can do, too.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Simple Types without –xl

Without -xl, simple types match, as in the following example:

The Pascal procedure,

SimVar.p

procedure SimVar(

var t, f: boolean;

var c: char;

var si: integer16;

var i: integer;

var sr: shortreal;

var r: real);

begin

t := true;

f := false;

c := 'z';

si := 9;

i := 9;

sr := 9.9;

r := 9.9;

end; { SimVar }

The C main program,

#include <stdio.h>

SimVarMain.c

extern void SimVar(char *, char *, char *, short *,

int *, float *, double *);

int main(void)

{

char

short

int

t, f, c;

si;

float

double

sr;

SimVar(&t, &f, &c, &si, &i, &sr, &r);

printf(" %08o %08o %c %d %d %3.1f %3.1f \n",

t, f, c, si, i, sr, r);

}

The C–Pascal Interface

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute SimVar.pand

SimVarMain.c

hostname% pc -c SimVar.p

hostname% cc SimVar.o SimVarMain.c

hostname% a.out

00000001 00000000 z 9 9 9.9 9.9

Simple Types with –xl

With the -xloption, the Pascal realmust be paired with a C float, and the

Pascal integermust be paired with a C shortint.

Strings of Characters

The C counterpart to the Pascal alfaand stringtypes are arrays; C passes

all arrays by reference. The C counterpart to the Pascal varyingis a structure;

C passes structures by value.

Before you call Pascal with a null varying string, set the byte count to zero

because that is what Pascal assumes about such strings.

C can pass a structure consisting of a four-byte integer and an array of

characters to a Pascal procedure, expecting a varparameter that is a variable-

length string.

See the following example:

The Pascal procedure,

type

StrVar.p

TVarStr = varying [25] of char;

procedure StrVar(

var a: alfa;

var s: string;

var v: TVarStr);

begin

a := 'abcdefghi' + chr(0);

s := 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz' + chr(0);

v := 'varstr' + chr(0);

end; { StrVar }

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The C main program,

StrVarMain.c

#include <stdio.h>

#include <string.h>

struct TVarLenStr {

int nbytes;

char a[25];

};

extern void StrVar(char *, char *, struct TVarLenStr *);

int main(void)

{

struct TVarLenStr vls;

char s10[10], s80[80], s25[25];

vls.nbytes = 0;

StrVar(s10, s80, &vls);

strncpy(s25, vls.a, vls.nbytes);

printf(" s10 = '%s' \n s80 = '%s' \n s25 = '%s' \n",

s10, s80, s25);

printf(" strlen(s25) = %d \n", strlen(s25));

}

The commands to compile and

execute StrVar.pand

StrVarMain.c

hostname% pc -c StrVar.p

hostname% cc StrVar.o StrVarMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

s10='abcdefghi'

s80='abcdefghijklmnopqrtstuvwxyz'

s25='varstr'

strlen(s25)=6

Fixed Arrays

For a ﬁxed array parameter, pass the same type and size by reference, as

shown in the following example:

The C–Pascal Interface

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Pascal procedure,

FixVec.p

type

VecTyp = array [0..8] of integer;

procedure FixVec(var V: TVec; var Sum: integer);

var

i: integer;

begin

Sum := 0;

for i := 0 to 8 do

Sum := Sum + V[i]

end; { FixVec }

The C main program,

#include <stdio.h>

FixVecMain.c

extern void FixVec(int [], int *);

int main(void)

{

int Sum;

static int a[] = {0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8};

FixVec(a, &Sum);

printf(" %d \n", Sum);

}

The commands to compile and

execute FixVec.pand

FixVecMain.c

hostname% pc -c -calign FixVec.p

hostname% cc FixVec.o FixVecMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

Although it does not apply in this example, arrays of aggregates in Pascal

have, by default, a size that is always a multiple of four bytes. When you use

the -calignoption to compile the Pascal code, that difference with C is

eliminated.

The following example illustrates this point. The string 'Sunday'only gets

through to the C main program when you compile the Pascal routine using

-calign.

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Pascal procedure,

DaysOfWeek.p

type

TDay= array [0..8] of char;

TWeek = array [0..6] of day;

TYear = array [0..51] of week;

procedure DaysOfWeek(var Y: TYear);

begin

v[1][1] := 'Sunday';

end;

The C main program,

#include <stdio.h>

DaysOfWeekMain.c

extern void DaysOfWeek(char [][7][9]);

int main(void)

{

char Year[52][7][9];

DaysOfWeek(Year);

printf(" Day = '%s' \n", Year[1][1]);

}

The commands to compile and

execute DaysOfWeek.pand

DaysOfWeekMain.cwithout

-calign

hostname% pc -c DaysOfWeek.p

hostname% cc DaysOfWeek.o DaysOfWeekMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

Day = ''

The commands to compile and

execute DaysOfWeek.pand

DaysOfWeekMain.cwith

-calign

hostname% pc -c -calign DaysOfWeek.p

hostname% cc DaysOfWeek.o DaysOfWeekMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

day = 'Sunday '

The C–Pascal Interface

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The univArrays

You can pass any size array to a Pascal procedure expecting a univarray,

although there is no special gain in doing so, because there is no type or size

checking for separate compilations. However, if you want to use an existing

Pascal procedure that has a univarray, you can do so. All univarrays that

are in, out, in out, or varparameters pass by reference.

The Pascal procedure,

UniVec.p, which deﬁnes a 10-

element array

type

TVec = array [0..9] of integer;

procedure UniVec(

var V: univ TVec;

in Last: integer;

var Sum: integer);

var

i: integer;

begin

Sum := 0;

for i := 0 to Last do

Sum := Sum + V[i];

end; { UniVec }

The C main program,

#include <stdio.h>

UniVecMain.c, which passes

a 3-element array to the Pascal

procedure written to do a 10-

element array

extern void UniVec(int *, int, int *);

int main(void)

{

int Sum;

static int a[] = {7, 8, 9};

UniVec(a, 2, &Sum);

printf(" %d \n", Sum);

}

100

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute UniVec.pand

UniVecMain.cwith -calign

hostname% pc -c -calign UniVec.p

hostname% cc UniVec.o UniVecMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

Conformant Arrays

For single-dimension conformant arrays, pass upper and lower bounds, placed

after the declared parameter list. If the array is multidimensional, pass

element widths as well, one element width for each dimension, except the last

one.

See this example:

function ip(var x: array [lb..ub: integer] of real): real;

extern double ip(double [], int, int);

...

double v1[10];

double z;

z = ip(v1, 0, 9);

...

One bounds pair may apply to several arrays if they are declared in the same

parameter group:

function ip(var x,y:array[lb..ub:integer] of real):real;

...

double v1[10], v2[10] ;

extern double ip() ;

double z ;

z = ip ( v1, v2, 0, 9 ) ;

...

With multidimensional arrays, for all dimensions but the last one, pass the low

bound, high bound, and element width.

The C–Pascal Interface

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Examples of single-dimension, multidimension, and array-of-character

conformant arrays follow. Conformant arrays are included here only because

they are a relatively standard feature; there are usually more efﬁcient and

simpler ways to do the same thing.

Example 1: Single-Dimension Array

The Pascal procedure,

IntCA.p. Pascal passes the

bounds pair.

procedure IntCA(var a: array [lb..ub: integer] of integer);

begin

a[1] := 1;

a[2] := 2

end; { IntCA }

The C main program,

#include <stdio.h>

IntCAMain.c

extern void IntCA(int [], int, int);

int main(void)

{

int k ;

static int s[] = { 0, 0, 0 };

IntCA (s, 0, sizeof(s)-1);

for (k=0 ; k < 3 ; k++)

printf(" %d \n", s[k]);

}

The commands to compile and

execute IntCA.pand

IntCAMain.cwith -calign

hostname% pc -c -calign IntCA.p

hostname% cc IntCA.o IntCAMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

102

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example 2: Multi-Dimension Array

The Pascal procedure,

RealCA.p. Pascal passes low

bound, high bound, and element

width.

procedure RealCA(var A: array [r1..r2: integer] of

array [c1..c2: integer] of real);

var

col, row: integer;

begin

for row := r1 to r2 do

for col := c1 to c2 do

if row = col then

A[row, col] := 1.0

else

A[row, col] := 0.0

end; { RealCA }

The C main program,

#include <stdio.h>

RealCAMain.c. Array Mhas 2

rows of 3 columns each. c1and

c2are the ﬁrst and last columns.

r1and r2are the ﬁrst and last

rows. wcis the width of a column

element (smallest) and is equal to

sizeof( M[0][0] ). wris the

width of a row element (next

largest) and is equal to

#define NC 3

#define NR 2

extern void RealCA(double [][NC], int, int, int, int, int);

int main(void)

{

double

int

M[NR][NC];

col, c1, c2, row, r1, r2, wc, wr;

(c2-c1+1) * wc.

c1 = 0;

r1 = 0;

c2 = NC - 1;

r2 = NR - 1;

wc = sizeof(M[0][0]);

wr = (c2 - c1 + 1) * wc;

RealCA(M, r1, r2, wr, c1, c2);

for (row = r1; row <= r2; row++) {

printf("\n");

for (col = c1; col <= c2; col++)

printf("%4.1f", M[row][col]);

};

printf("\n");

}

The C–Pascal Interface

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute RealCA.pand

RealCAMain.cwith -calign

hostname% pc -c -calign RealCA.p

hostname% cc RealCA.o RealCAMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

1.0 0.0 0.0

0.0 1.0 0.0

If wcis the width of the smallest element, as determined by sizeof(), then

the width of the next largest element is the number of those smaller elements

in the next larger element multiplied by wc.

width of next largest element = (ub - lb + 1) * wc

In general, (lb, ub, wc) are the bounds and element width of the next lower

dimension of the array. This deﬁnition is recursive.

Example 3: Array of Characters

The Pascal procedure,

procedure ChrCAVar(var a: array [lb..ub: integer] of char);

ChrCAVar.p

begin

a[0] := 'T';

a[13] := 'o';

end; { ChrCAVar }

The C main program,

#include <stdio.h>

ChrCAVarMain.c. For C, the

lower bound is always 0.

extern void ChrCAVar(char [], int, int);

int main(void)

{

static char s[] = "this is a string" ;

ChrCAVar(s,0, sizeof(s)-1) ; /*(s, lower, upper)*/

printf("%11s \n", s) ;

}

104

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute ChrCAVar.pand

ChrCAVarMain.c

hostname% pc -c -calign ChrCAVar.p

hostname% cc ChrCAVar.o ChrCAVarMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

This is a string

Records and Structures

In most cases, a Pascal record describes the same objects as its C structure

equivalent, provided that the components have compatible types and are

declared in the same order. The compatibility of the types depends mostly on

size and alignment. For more information on size and alignments of simple

components, see “Compatibility of Types for C and Pascal” on page 90.

By default, the alignment of a record is always four bytes and the size of a

record is always a multiple of four bytes. However, when you use -calignin

compiling the Pascal code, the size and alignment of the Pascal record matches

the size and alignment of the equivalent C structure.

A Pascal record of an integer and a character string matches a C structure of

the same constructs, as follows:

The Pascal procedure,

type

StruChr.p. It is safer for the

Pascal procedure to explicitly

provide the null byte and include

it in the count before the string is

passed to C.

TLenStr = record

nbytes: integer;

chrstr: array [0..24] of char

end;

procedure StruChr(var v: TLenStr);

begin

v.NBytes := 14;

v.ChrStr := 'St. Petersburg' + chr(0);

end; { StruChr }

The C–Pascal Interface

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The C main program,

StruChrMain.c

#include <stdio.h>

#include <string.h>

struct TVarLenStr {

int NBytes;

char a[25];

};

extern void StruChr(struct TVarLenStr *);

int main(void)

{

struct TVarLenStr vls;

char s25[25];

vls.NBytes = 0;

StruChr(&vls);

strncpy(s25, vls.a, vls.NBytes);

printf(" s25 = '%s' \n", s25);

printf(" strlen(s25) = %d \n", strlen(s25));

}

The commands to compile and

execute StruChr.pand

StruChrMain.c

hostname% pc -c StruChr.p

hostname% cc StruChr.o StruChrMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

s25='St. Petersburg'

strlen(s25) = 13

The record in the example above has, by default, the same size and alignment

as the equivalent C record. Some records, though, are laid out differently

unless you use the -calignoption.

106

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Consider this example:

The Pascal routine,

type

DayWeather.p

TDayWeather = record

TDay: array [0..8] of char;

TWeather: array [0..20] of char;

end;

TDayWeatherArray = array [0..1] of TDayWeather;

procedureDayWeather(varW:TDayWeatherArray;

varWeatherSize:integer);

begin

W[1].TDay := 'Sunday' + chr(0);

W[1].TWeather := 'Sunny' + chr(0);

WeatherSize := 5;

end; { StruChr }

The C main program,

DayWeatherMain.c

#include <stdio.h>

#include <string.h>

struct TDayRec {

char TDay[9];

char TWeather[21];

};

extern void DayWeather(struct TDayRec [], int *);

int main(void)

{

char s25[25];

char t25[25];

struct TDayRec dr[2];

int nbytes = 0;

DayWeather(dr, &nbytes);

strncpy(s25, dr[1].TDay, 6);

printf(" day = '%s' \n", s25);

strncpy(t25, dr[1].TWeather, nbytes);

printf(" weather = '%s' \n", t25);

}

The C–Pascal Interface

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When you compile the Pascal routine without using the -calignoption, the

program does not work correctly.

The commands to compile and

execute DayWeather.pand

DayWeatherMain.cwithout

-calign

hostname% pc -c DayWeather.p

hostname% cc DayWeather.o DayWeatherMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

day = ''

weather = ' sun'

The commands to compile and

execute DayWeather.pand

DayWeatherMain.cwith

-calign

hostname% pc -calign -c DayWeather.p

hostname% cc DayWeather.o DayWeatherMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

day = 'Sunday'

weather = 'sunny'

Variant Records

C equivalents of variant records can sometimes be constructed, although there

is some variation with architecture and sometimes a need to adjust alignment.

You can avoid the need to adjust alignment by using the -calignoption.

The Pascal procedure,

type

VarRec.p

vr = record

case tag: char of

'a': (ch1, ch2: char);

'b': (flag: boolean);

'K': (ALIGN: integer);

end;

procedure VarRec(var x: vr);

begin

if x.ch1 = 'a' then

x.ch2 := 'Z'

end; { VarRec }

108

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The C main program,

#include <stdio.h>

VarRecMain.c

struct vlr {

char tag;

union {

struct {

char ch1, ch2;

}a_var;

struct {

char flag;

}b_var;

struct {

int ALIGN;

}c_var;

}var_part;

};

extern void VarRec(struct vlr *);

int main(void)

{

struct vlr *x;

x = (struct vlr *)malloc(sizeof(struct vlr));

x->tag = 'a';

x->var_part.a_var.ch1 = 'a';

x->var_part.a_var.ch2 = 'b';

VarRec(x);

printf(" %c \n", x->var_part.a_var.ch2);

}

The commands to compile and

execute VarRec.pand

VarRecMain.c

hostname% pc -c -calign VarRec.p

hostname% cc VarRec.o VarRecMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

The C–Pascal Interface

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pascal Set Type

In Pascal, a set type is implemented as a bit vector, which is similar to a C

short-word array. Direct access to individual elements of a set is highly

machine-dependent and should be avoided.

In Pascal, bits are numbered within a byte from the most signiﬁcant to least, as

shown in Table 6-3.

Table 6-3 Set Implementation

Set

Bit Numbering

set+3:

set+2:

set+1:

set+0:

31, 30, 29, 28, 27, 26, 25, 24

23, 22, 21, 20, 19, 18, 17, 16

15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8

7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0

In C, a set could be described as a short-word array beginning at an even

address. With the current set representation, it does not matter what the

lower-bound value is.

The nth element in a set [lower...upper]can be tested as follows:

#define LG2BITSLONG 5 /* log2( bits in long word) */

#define LG2BITSWORD 4 /* log2( bits in short word) */

#define MSKBITSLONG 0x1f

#define MSKBITSHORT 0x0

short *setptr; /* set as array of shorts */

int upper;

int elem;

int i;

/* upper bound of the set */

/* ordinal value of set element */

if ( setptr[elem >> LG2BITSWORD] &

(1 << (elem & MSKBITSWORD))

/* elem is in set */

) {

}

110

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pascal intsetType

The Pascal intsettype is predeﬁned as set of [0..127]. A variable of

this type takes 16 bytes of storage.

The Pascal procedure,

IntSetVar.p, which has an

intsetof the elements

[1, 3, 7, 8]

procedure IntSetVar(var s: intset);

begin

s := [1, 3, 7, 8]

end; { IntSetVar }

The C main program,

#include <stdio.h>

IntSetVarMain.c

extern void IntSetVar(unsigned int *);

int main(void)

{

int w ;

unsigned int *p, *s ;

s = (unsigned int *) malloc(16);

IntSetVar(s) ;

for (w = 0, p = s ; w < 4 ; w++, p++)

printf("%012o %3d \n", *p, w);

printf(" 110 001 010 (binary, word 4) \n");

printf(" 876 543 210 (bits, word 4)" \n");

}

The commands to compile and

execute IntSetVar.pand

IntSetVarMain.c. The

output of this example depends

on the architecture of your

machine.

hostname% pc -c IntSetVar.p

hostname% cc IntSetVar.o IntSetVarMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

000000000000 0

000000000000 1

000000000000 2

000000000612 3

110 001 010 (binary, word 4)

876 543 210 (bits, word 4)

The C–Pascal Interface

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Value Parameters

There are three types of value parameters in Pascal.

Simple Types without –xl

Without –xl, simple types match, as in the following example:

The Pascal procedure,

SimVal. p. t, f, c, i, r, and s

are value parameters.

procedure SimVal(

t, f: boolean;

c: char;

si: integer16;

i: integer;

sr: shortreal;

r: real;

var reply: integer);

begin

Reply := 0;

if t then

Reply := Reply + 1;

if not f then

Reply := Reply + 8;

if c='z' then

Reply := Reply + 64;

if si=9 then

Reply := Reply + 512;

if i=9 then

Reply := Reply + 4096;

if sr=shortreal(9.9) then

Reply := Reply + 32768;

if r=9.9 then

Reply := Reply + 262144;

end; { SimVal }

112

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The C main program,

#include <stdio.h>

SimValMain.c

extern void SimVal(

char, char, char,

short,

int,

float,

double,

int *);

int main(void)

{

char

short

int

t = 1, f = 0;

c = 'z';

si = 9;

i = 9;

float

double

int

sr = 9.9;

r = 9.9;

args;

SimVal(t, f, c, si, i, sr, r, &args);

printf(" args = %06o \n", args);

The commands to compile and

execute SimVal.pand

SimValMain.c

hostname% pc -c SimVal.p

hostname% cc SimVal.o SimValMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

args=111111

If no function prototype is provided for SimValin SimValMain.c, then

sr:shortrealmust be changed to sr:realin SimVal.p. This change is

necessary because in C, a floatis promoted to double in the absence of

function prototypes. In -xlmode, change sr:shortrealto sr:longreal.

Simple Types with –xl

With -xl, the Pascal realmust be paired with a C float, and the Pascal

integermust be paired with a C short int.

The C–Pascal Interface

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Arrays

Since C cannot pass arrays by value, it cannot pass strings of characters, ﬁxed

arrays, or univarrays by value.

Conformant Arrays

Pascal passes all value parameters on the stack or in registers, except for value

conformant array parameters, which are handled by creating a copy in the

caller environment and passing a pointer to the copy. In addition, the bounds

of the array must be passed (see “Conformant Arrays” on page 101).

This example is the same as the single-dimension example in “Conformant

Arrays,” except that the varpreﬁx is deleted.

The Pascal procedure,

procedureChrCAVal(a:array [lb..ub: integer] of char);

ChrCAVal.p

begin

a[0] := 'T';

a[13] := 'o';

end; { ChrCAVal }

The C main program,

#include <stdio.h>

ChrCAValMain.c

extern void ChrCAVal(char [], int, int);

int main(void)

{

static char s[] = "This is a string";

ChrCAVal(s, 0, sizeof(s) -1);

printf(" %11s \n", s);

}

114

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute ChrCAVal.pand

ChrCAValMain.cwith

-calign

hostname% pc -c -calign ChrCAVal.p

hostname% cc ChrCAVal.o ChrCAValMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

This is a string

Function Return Values

Function return values match types the same as with parameters, and they

pass in much the same way.

Simple Types

The simple types pass in a straightforward way, as follows:

The Pascal function,

RetReal.p

function RetReal(x: real): real;

begin

RetReal := x + 1.0

end; { RetReal }

The C main program,

#include <stdio.h>

RetRealMain.c

extern double RetReal(double);

int main(void)

{

double r, s;

r = 2.0;

s = RetReal(r);

printf(" %f \n", s);

}

The C–Pascal Interface

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute RetReal.pand

RetRealMain.c

hostname% pc -c RetReal.p

hostname% cc RetReal.o RetRealMain.c

hostname% a.out

3.000000

Input and Output

If your C main program calls a Pascal procedure that does I/ O, then include

the following code in the C main program before you call the Pascal procedure:

__PC0__PCSTART();

Also, in the C main program just before exit, add the following line:

__PC0__PCEXIT();

See this example:

The Pascal procedure, IO.p

procedure IO;

begin

writeln('Hello Pascal and St. Petersburg!');

end;

The C main program, IOMain.c #include <stdio.h>

extern void IO();

int main(void)

{

IO();

printf("Hello C! \n");

}

116

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute IO.pand IOMain.c

hostname% pc -c IO.p

hostname% cc IO.o IOMain.c -lpc

hostname% a.out

Hello Pascal and St. Petersburg!

Hello C!

Procedure Calls: Pascal–C

This section parallels the section, “Procedure Calls: C–Pascal” on page 93.

Earlier comments and restrictions also apply here.

Variable Parameters

Pascal passes all variable parameters by reference, which C can do, too.

Simple Types

Simple types pass in a straightforward manner, as follows:

The C function, SimRef.c

void SimRef(

char

short

int

*t,

*f,

*c,

*si,

*i,

*sr,

*r)

float

double

{

}

*t = 1;

*f = 0;

*c = 'z';

*si = 9;

*i = 9;

*sr = 9.9;

*r = 9.9;

The C–Pascal Interface

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Pascal main program,

SimRefMain.p

program SimRefMain(output);

var

t, f: boolean;

c: char;

si: integer16;

i: integer;

sr: shortreal;

r: real;

procedure SimRef(

var t, f: boolean;

var c: char;

var si: integer16;

var i: integer;

var sr: shortreal;

var r: real);

external c;

begin

SimRef(t, f, c, si, i, sr, r);

writeln(t, f: 6, c: 2, si: 2, i: 2, sr :4:1, r :4:1);

end. { SimRefMain }

The commands to compile and

execute SimRef.cand

SimRefMain.p

hostname% cc -c SimRef.c

hostname% pc SimRef.o SimRefMain.p

hostname% a.out

true false z 9 9 9.9 9.9

Strings of Characters

The alfaand stringtypes pass simply; varying strings are more

complicated. All pass by reference.

118

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The C function, StrVar.c

#include <string.h>

struct TVarLenStr {

int nbytes;

char a[26];

};

void StrVar(char *s10, char *s80, struct TVarLenStr *vls)

{

static char ax[11] = "abcdefghij";

static char sx[81] = "abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz";

static char vx[6] = "varstr";

strncpy(s10, ax, 11);

strncpy(s80, sx, 80);

strncpy(vls->a, vx, 6);

vls->nbytes = 6;

}

The Pascal main program,

StrVarMain.p

program StrVarMain(output);

type

TVarStr = varying[26] of char;

var

a: alfa;

s: string;

v: TVarstr;

procedure StrVar(var a: alfa; var s: string; var v: TVarStr);

external c;

begin

StrVar(a, s, v);

writeln(a);

writeln(s);

writeln(v);

writeln(' length(v) = ', length(v) :2);

end. { StrVarMain }

The C–Pascal Interface

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute StrVar.cand

StrVarMain.p

hostname% cc -c StrVar.c

hostname% pc StrVar.o StrVarMain.p

hostname% a.out

abcdefghij

abcdefghijklmnopqrtstuvwxyz

varstr

length(v) = 6

Avoid constructs that rely on strings being in static variable storage. For

example, you could use mktemp(3) in Pascal as follows:

Incorrect use of string in static

variable storage

tmp := mktemp('/tmp/eph.xxxxxx')

This use is incorrect, since mktemp()modiﬁes its argument. Instead, use the C

library routine strncpy()(see string(3)) to copy the string constant to a

declared chararray variable, as in:

Correct solution using the C

program Use_mktemp ;

library routine strncpy()

procedure strncpy( var dest: univ string ;

var srce: univ string ;

length: integer) ; external c ;

procedure mktemp(var dest: univ string); external c;

...

var path: string ;

begin

...

strncpy( path, '/tmp/eph.xxxxxx', sizeof(path)) ;

mktemp( path ) ;

...

end .

120

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fixed Arrays

For a ﬁxed-array parameter, pass the same type and size, as in this example:

The C function, FixVec.c

void FixVec(int V[9], int *Sum)

{

int i;

*Sum = 0;

for (i = 0; i <= 8; i++)

*Sum = *Sum + V[i];

}

The Pascal main program,

program FixVecMain(output);

FixVecMain.p

type

TVec = array [0..8] of integer;

var

V: TVec := [0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8];

Sum: integer;

procedure FixVec(var XV: TVec; var XSum: integer); external c;

begin

FixVec(V, Sum);

writeln(Sum: 3);

end. { FixVecMain }

The commands to compile and

execute FixVec.cand

FixVecMain.p

hostname% cc -c FixVec.c

hostname% pc -calign FixVec.o FixVecMain.p

hostname% a.out

The -calignoption is not needed for this example, but may be necessary if

the array parameter is an array of aggregates.

The C–Pascal Interface

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The univArrays

The univarrays that are in, out, inout,or varparameters pass by

reference.

Here is an example:

The C function, UniVec.c

void UniVec(int V[3], int Last, int *Sum)

{

int i;

*Sum = 0;

for (i = 0; i <= Last; i++)

*Sum += V[i];

}

The Pascal main program,

UniVecMain.p

program UniVecMain(output);

type

TVec = array [0..9] of integer;

var

Sum: integer;

V: array [0..2] of integer;

procedure UniVec(var V: univ TVec; in Last: integer;

var Sum: integer);

external c;

begin

V[0] := 7;

V[1] := 8;

V[2] := 9;

UniVec(V, 2, Sum);

writeln(Sum);

end. { UniVecMain }

The commands to compile and

execute UniVec.cand

UniVecMain.p

hostname% cc -c UniVec.c

hostname% pc -calign UniVec.o UniVecMain.p

hostname% a.out

122

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The -calignoption is not needed for this example, but may be necessary if

the array parameter is an array of aggregates.

Conformant Arrays

For single-dimension conformant arrays, pass upper and lower bounds placed

after the declared parameter list. If the array is multidimensional, pass

element widths as well, one element width for each dimension, except the last

one. Chapter 8, “The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface,” has an example of

multidimensional conformant array passing.

The following example uses a single-dimension array:

The C function, IntCA.c

void IntCA(int a[], int lb, int ub)

{

int k;

for (k=0; k <= ub - lb; k++)

a[k] = 4;

}

The Pascal main program,

IntCAMain.p. Note that what

Pascal passes as s, is received

in C as a, lb, ub.

program IntCAMain(output);

var

s: array [1..3] of integer;

i: integer;

procedure IntCA(var a: array [lb..ub: integer] of integer);

external c;

begin

IntCA(s);

for i := 1 to 3 do

write(s[i]);

writeln

end. { IntCAMain }

The C–Pascal Interface

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute IntCA.cand

IntCAMain.p

hostname% cc -c IntCA.c

hostname% pc -calign IntCA.o IntCAMain.p

hostname% a.out

The -calignoption is not needed for this example, but may be necessary if

the array parameter is an array of aggregates.

Records and Structures

In most cases, a Pascal record describes the same objects as its C structure

equivalent, provided that the components have compatible types and are

declared in the same order. For more information, see “Compatibility of Types

for C and Pascal” on page 90.

Records that contain aggregates may differ because aggregates in C and Pascal

sometimes have different sizes and alignments. If you compile the Pascal code

with the -calignoption, the differences are eliminated.

A Pascal record of an integer and a character string matches a C structure of an

integer and an array of charvalues, as follows:

The C function, StruChr.c

#include <string.h>

struct TVarLenStr {

int nbytes;

char a[26];

};

void StruChr(struct TVarLenStr *v)

{

strncpy(v->a, "strvar", 6);

v->nbytes = 6;

}

124

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Pascal main program,

StruChrMain.p

program StruChrMain(output);

type

TVarLenStr = record

nbytes: integer;

a: array [0..25] of char

end;

var

vls: TVarLenStr;

i: integer;

procedure StruChr(var vls: TVarLenStr); external c;

begin

StruChr(vls);

write(' string=''');

for i := 0 to vls.nbytes - 1 do

write(vls.a[i]);

writeln('''');

writeln(' length = ', vls.nbytes)

end. { StruChrMain }

The commands to compile and

execute StruChr.cand

StruChrMain.p

hostname% cc -c StruChr.c

hostname% pc -calign StruChr.o StruChrMain.p

hostname% a.out

string=' strvar'

length=

Variant Records

C equivalents of variant records can sometimes be constructed, although there

is some variation with the architecture, and sometimes you have to adjust the

alignment.

The C–Pascal Interface

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Following are some examples:

The C function, VarRec.c

struct vlr {

char tag;

union {

struct {

char ch1, ch2;

} a_var;

struct {

char flag;

} b_var;

struct {

int ALIGN;

} c_var;

} var_part;

};

void VarRec(struct vlr *x)

{

if (x->var_part.a_var.ch1 == 'a')

x->var_part.a_var.ch2 = 'Z';

}

126

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Pascal main program,

VarRecMain.p

program VarRecMain;

type

vr = record

case tag: char of

'a': (ch1, ch2: char);

'b': (flag: boolean);

'K': (ALIGN: integer)

end;

var

x: vr;

procedure VarRec(var d: vr); external c;

begin

x.tag := 'a';

x.ch1 := 'a';

x.ch2 := 'b';

VarRec(x);

writeln(x.ch2)

end. { VarRecMain }

The commands to compile and

execute VarRec.cand

VarRecMain.p

hostname% cc -c VarRec.c

hostname% pc -calign VarRec.o VarRecMain.p

hostname% a.out

The -calignoption is not needed in the previous example, but may be

necessary if the record contains aggregates.

Non-Pascal Procedures

When you use the -xloption in compiling Pascal code, you can use the

nonpascalkeyword to declare that an external procedure is written in

another language. This keyword generally causes everything to be passed by

reference.

The C–Pascal Interface

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

See this example:

The C function, NonPas.c. In

the function for_C, sis a

pointer (declared varin the

procedure declaration), and len

is not a pointer (not declared

varin the procedure

declaration). In the function

for_nonpascal, sis still a

pointer (though not declared

varin the procedure

#include <stdio.h>

void for_C(char *s, int len)

{

int i;

for (i = 0; i < len; i++)

putchar(s[i]);

putchar('\n');

}

declaration), and lenis now a

pointer (though not declared

var).

void for_NonPascal(char *s, int *len)

{

int i;

for (i = 0; i < *len; i++)

putchar(s[i]);

putchar('\n');

}

The Pascal main program,

NonPasMain.p

program NonPasMain;

var

s: string;

procedure for_C(var s: string; len: integer); external c;

procedure for_NonPascal(var s: string; len: integer); nonpascal;

begin

s :='Hello from Pascal';

for_C(s, 18);

for_NonPascal(s, 18);

end. { NonPasMain }

The commands to compile and

execute NonPas.cand

NonPasMain.p

hostname% cc -c NonPas.c

hostname% pc NonPas.o NonPasMain.p

hostname% a.out

Hello from Pascal

128

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Value Parameters

In general, Pascal passes value parameters in registers or on the stack,

widening to a full word if necessary.

Simple Types

With value parameters, simple types match, as in the following example:

The C function, SimVal.c

void SimVal(

char

short

int

si,

float

double

int

sr,

*reply)

{

*reply = 0;

if (t)

if (!f)

if (c == 'z')

if (si == 9)

if (i == 9)

*reply +=

*reply += 01000;

*reply += 010000;

01;

010;

0100;

if (sr ==(float)9.9) *reply += 0100000;

if (r == 9.9) *reply +=01000000;

}

The C–Pascal Interface

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Pascal main program,

SimValMain.p

program SimVal(output);

var

t: boolean

f: boolean

c: char

:= true;

:= false;

:= 'z';

si: integer16 := 9;

i: integer := 9;

sr: shortreal := 9.9;

r: double

:= 9.9;

args: integer;

procedure SimVal(

t, f: boolean;

c: char;

si: integer16;

i: integer;

sr: shortreal;

r: double;

var Reply: integer);

external c;

begin

SimVal(t, f, c, si, i, sr, r, args);

writeln(' args = ', args :6 oct);

end. { SimVal }

The commands to compile and

execute SimVal.cand

SimValMain.p

hostname% cc -c SimVal.c

hostname% pc SimVal.o SimValMain.p

hostname% a.out

args=111111

Function Return Values

Function return values match types in the same manner as with parameters,

and they pass in much the same way. See “Variable Parameters” on page 94.

The following example shows how to pass simple types.

130

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The C function, RetReal.c

double RetReal(double *x)

{

return(*x + 1.0);

}

The Pascal main program,

RetRealMain.p

program RetRealMain;

var

r, s: real;

function RetReal(var x: real): real; external c;

begin

r := 2.0;

s := RetReal(r);

writeln(r: 4: 1, s: 4: 1)

end. { RetRealMain }

The commands to compile and

execute RetReal.cand

RetRealMain.p

hostname% cc -c RetReal.c

hostname% pc RetReal.o RetRealMain.p

hostname% a.out

2.0 3.0

Parameters That Are Pointers to Procedures

Pascal has a special type that is a pointer to a procedure. A variable of this

type can be used as a parameter, as follows:

The C function, ProcPar.c

#include <string.h>

void proc_c (void (*p)()) /* apointertoprocedureargument */

{

char *s ;

s = "Called from C";

(*p)( s, strlen(s)); /*CallthePascalroutine */

}

The C–Pascal Interface

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Pascal main program,

ProcParMain.p, which calls the

C procedure, proc_c, passing it

the address of the Pascal

procedure, proc_pas. The C

procedure assigns a value to the

string s, and calls the procedure

whose pointer it just received.

Then the Pascal procedure,

proc_pas, writes a literal

constant and the string it just

received.

program ProcParMain;

type

{ Declare a procedure pointer type. }

proc_ptr = ^procedure(var s: string; i: integer);

{Declare an external C procedure which takes a procedure argument.}

procedure proc_c(p: proc_ptr); external c;

procedure proc_pas(var cstr: string; strlen: integer);

var

i: integer;

begin

write('Hello from PROC_PASCAL: ');

for i := 1 to strlen do

write(cstr[i])

writeln;

end; { proc_pas }

begin

{ Call the C routine. }

proc_c(addr(proc_pas))

end. { ProcParMain }

The commands to compile and

execute ProcPar.cand

ProcParMain.p

hostname% cc -c ProcPar.c

hostname% pc ProcPar.o ProcParMain.p

hostname% a.out

Hello from PROC_PASCAL: Called from C

Procedures and Functions as Parameters

It is probably clearer to pass a pointer to a procedure than to pass the

procedure name itself. See “Procedure Calls: Pascal–C” on page 117.

A procedure or function passed as an argument is associated with a static link

to its lexical parent’s activation record. When an outer block procedure or

function is passed as an argument, Pascal passes a null pointer in the position

normally occupied by the passed routine’s static link. So that procedures and

132

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

functions can be passed to other languages as arguments, the static links for all

procedure or function arguments are placed after the end of the conformant

array bounds pairs, if any.

Routines in other languages can be passed to Pascal; a dummy argument must

be passed in the position normally occupied by the passed routine’s static link.

If the passed routine is not a Pascal routine, the argument is used only as a

placeholder.

Global Variables in C and Pascal

If the types are compatible, a global variable can be shared between C and

Pascal.

An example:

The Pascal procedure,

var

GloVar.p

Year: integer;

procedure GloVar;

begin

Year := 2001

end; { GloVar }

The C main program,

GloVarMain.c

#include <stdio.h>

extern void GloVar();

int Year;

int main(void)

{

Year = 2042;

GloVar();

printf( " %d \n", Year ) ;

}

The C–Pascal Interface

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute GloVar.pand

GloVarMain.cwithout –xl.

With -xl, the Pascal integer

must be paired with a C short

intand declared publicsince

the default visibility is private.

hostname% pc -c GloVar.p

hostname% cc GloVar.o GloVarMain.c

hostname% a.out

2001

File-Passing Between Pascal and C

You can pass a ﬁle pointer from Pascal to C, then have C do the I/ O, as in:

The C procedure,

#include <stdio.h>

UseFilePtr.c

void UseFilePtr (FILE *ptr)

{

{ /* Write to the file: */

fprintf( ptr, "[1] Passingthefiledescriptor\n") ;

fprintf( ptr, "[2] and writing information \n") ;

fprintf( ptr, "[3] to a file \n") ;

}

The Pascal main program,

UseFilePtrMain.p

program UseFilePtrMain;

var

f: text;

cfile: univ_ptr;

procedure UseFilePtr(cf: univ_ptr); external c;

begin

rewrite(f, 'myfile.data'); { Make the file. }

cfile := getfile(f);

UseFilePtr(cfile);

{ Get a file pointer. }

{ Call the C function. }

end. { UseFilePtrMain }

134

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute UseFilePtc.cand

UseFilePtrMain.p

hostname% cc -c UseFilePtr.c

hostname% pc UseFilePtr.o UseFilePtrMain.p

hostname% a.out

hostname% cat myfile.data

[1] Passing the file descriptor

[2] and writing information

[3] to a file

The C–Pascal Interface

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

136

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TheC++–PascalInterface

This chapter describes how to mix C++ and Pascal modules in the same

program. It contains the following sections:

Sample Interface

page 137

page 138

page 155

page 161

page 162

Compatibility of Types for C++ and Pascal

C++ Name Encoding

Procedure Calls: C++–Pascal

Procedure Calls: Pascal–C++

Global Variables in C++ and Pascal

Pascal File Pointers to C++

Sample Interface

You must use the compiler option -lpcwhen you use CCto link a C++ main

routine that calls Pascal. -lpcdenotes linking with the Pascal runtime

support library libpc. On the Solaris 1.x environment, if you use pcto link,

you must add the -lcoption.

The -calignoption causes pcto use data formats for aggregate objects

similar to those in C++.

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Compatibility of Types for C++ and Pascal

Table 6-1 and Table 6-2 on page 90 list the default sizes and alignments of

compatible types for C and Pascal. They apply to C++ as well.

C++ Name Encoding

To implement function overloading and type-safe linkage, the C++ compiler

normally appends type information to the function names. To prevent the C++

compiler from doing so, and to allow Pascal to call a C++ function, declare the

C++ function with the extern"C"language construct. One common way to

do this is in the declaration of a function, like this:

extern "C" void f (int);

...

void f (int) { /* ...body of f... */ }

For brevity, you can also combine extern "C" with the deﬁnition of the

function, as in:

extern "C" void f (int)

{ /* ...body of f... */ }

Procedure Calls: C++–Pascal

Following are examples that illustrate how a C++ main program calls a Pascal

procedure. Included in each example are the Pascal procedure, the C++ main

program, and the commands to compile and execute the ﬁnal program.

The Pascal procedure, Samp,

in the ﬁle, Samp.p

procedure Samp (var i: integer; var r: real);

begin

i := 7;

r := 3.14;

end

138

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The C++ main program,

#include <stdio.h>

SampMain.cc

extern "C" void Samp (int&, double&);

int main(void)

{

int

double d;

Samp (i, d);

printf ("%d %3.2f \n", i, d);

}

The commands to compile and

execute Samp.p and

SampMain.cc:c

hostname% pc -c Samp.p

hostname% CC Samp.o SampMain.cc -lpc

hostname% a.out

7 3.14

Arguments Passed by Reference

C++ arguments can be passed by reference. This section describes how they

work with Pascal.

The C++–Pascal Interface

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Simple Types without the -xlOption

Without the -xloption, simple types match, as in the following example:

The Pascal procedure,

SampRef, in the ﬁle, Samp.p

procedure SamRef (

var t, f: boolean;

var c: char;

var i: integer;

var s: integer16;

var r: shortreal;

var d: real

);

begin

t := true;

f := false;

c := 'z';

i := 9;

s := 9;

r := 9.9;

d := 9.9;

end;

140

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The C++ main program,

#include <stdio.h>

SamRefMain.cc

extern "C" void SamRef (

char

int

short

float

double &);

int main(void)

{

char

int

short

t, f, c;

float r;

double d;

SamRef (t, f, c, i, s, r, d);

printf ("%08o %08o %c %d %d %3.1f %3.1f \n",

c, i, s, r,

d);

}

The commands to compile and

execute SamRef.pand

SamRefMain.cc

hostname% pc -c SamRef.p

hostname% CC SimRef.o SamRefMain.cc -lpc

hostname% a.out

00000001 00000000 z 9 9 9.9 9.9

Simple Types with the -xlOption

With the -xloption, the Pascal realmust be paired with a C++ float; the

Pascal integer must be paired with a C++ shortint.

The C++–Pascal Interface

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Strings of Characters

The C++ counterpart to the Pascal alfa and string types are arrays. The C++

counterpart to the Pascal varying type is a structure.

Here is an example:

The Pascal procedure,

type

StrRef.p

TVarStr = varying [25] of char;

procedure StrRef (

var a: alfa;

var s: string;

var v: TVarStr

);

begin

a := 'abcdefghi' + chr(0);

s := 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz' + chr(0);

v := 'varstr' + chr(0);

end;

142

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The C++ main program,

StrRefMain.cc

#include <stdio.h>

#include <string.h>

struct TVarLenStr {

int NBytes;

char a[25];

};

extern "C" void StrRef (

char *,

TVarLenStr &);

int main(void)

{

struct TVarLenStr vls;

chars10[10],

s80[80],

s25[25];

vls.NBytes = 0;

StrRef (s10, s80, vls);

strncpy (s25, vls.a, vls.NBytes);

printf (" s10 = '%s' \n s80 = '%s' \n s25 = '%s' \n",

s10,

s80,

s25);

printf (" strlen (s25) = %d \n", strlen(s25));

}

The commands to compile and

execute StrRef.pand

StrRefMain.cc

hostname% pc -c StrRef.p

hostname% CC StrRef.o StrRefMain.cc -lpc

hostname% a.out

s10 = 'abcdefghi'

s80 = 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz'

s25 = 'varstr'

strlen (s25) = 6

The C++–Pascal Interface

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fixed Arrays

The Pascal procedure,

type

FixVec.p

TVec = array [0..8] of integer;

procedure FixVec (

var V: TVec;

var Sum: integer

);

var

i: integer;

begin

Sum := 0;

for i := 0 to 8 do

Sum := Sum + V[i];

end;

The C++ main program,

#include <stdio.h>

FixVedMain.cc

extern "C" void FixVec (

int [],

int &);

int main(void)

{

int Sum;

static int a[] = {1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9};

FixVec (a, Sum);

printf (" %d \n", Sum);

}

The commands to compile and

execute FixVec.pand

FixVecMain.cc

hostname% pc -c FixVec.p

hostname% CC FixVec.o FixVecMain.cc -lpc

hostname% a.out

144

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Although it does not apply to this example, arrays of aggregates in Pascal

have, by default, a size that is a multiple of four bytes. When you use the

-calignoption to compile Pascal code, that difference from C++ is

eliminated.

The following example illustrates this point. The string 'Sunday'only gets

through to the C++ main program when you compile the Pascal routine using

the -calignoption.

The Pascal procedure,

type

DaysOfWeek.p

TDay = array [0..8] of char;

TWeek = array [0..6] of TDay;

TYear = array [0..51] of TWeek;

procedure DaysOfWeek (

var Y: TYear

);

begin

Y[1][1] := 'Sunday';

end;

The C++ main program,

#include <stdio.h>

DaysOfWeekMain.cc

extern "C" void DaysOfWeek (

char [52][7][9]);

int main(void)

{

char Year [52][7][9];

DaysOfWeek (Year);

printf (" Day = '%s' \n", Year[1][1]);

}

The C++–Pascal Interface

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute DaysOfWeek.p and

DaysOfWeekMain.ccwithout

the -calignoption

hostname% pc -c DaysOfWeek.p

hostname% CC DaysOfWeek.o DaysOfWeekMain.cc -lpc

hostname% a.out

Day = ''

The commands to compile and

execute DaysOfWeek.pand

DaysOfWeekMain.ccwiththe

-calignoption

hostname% pc -c -calign DaysOfWeek.p

hostname% CC DaysOfWeek.o DaysOfWeekMain.cc -lpc

hostname% a.out

Day = 'Sunday'

Records and Structures

A Pascal record of an integer and a character string matches a C++ structure of

the same constructs, as in this example:

The Pascal procedure,

type

StruChr.p. It is safer for the

Pascal procedure to explicitly

provide the null byte and include

it in the count before the string is

passed to C++.

TLenStr = record

NBytes: integer;

ChrStr: array [0..24] of char;

end;

procedure StruChr (

var v: TLenStr

);

begin

v.NBytes := 14;

v.ChrStr := 'St.Petersburg' + chr(0);

end;

146

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The C++ main program,

StruChrMain.cc

#include <stdio.h>

#include <string.h>

struct TVarLenStr {

int NBytes;

char a[25];

};

extern "C" void StruChr (

TVarLenStr &);

int main(void)

{

struct TVarLenStr vls;

char

s25[25];

vls.NBytes = 0;

StruChr (vls);

strncpy (s25, vls.a, vls.NBytes);

printf ("s25 = '%s' \n", s25);

printf ("strlen (s25) = %d \n", strlen(s25));

}

The commands to compile and

execute StruChr.pand

StruChr.cc

hostname% pc -c StruChr.p

hostname% CC StruChr.o StruChrMain.cc -lpc

hostname% a.out

s25 = 'St.Petersburg'

strlen (s25) = 13

The C++–Pascal Interface

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Consider this example:

The Pascal procedure,

type

DayWeather.p

TDayWeather = record

TDay: array [0..8] of char;

TWeather:array [0..20] of char;

end;

TDayWeatherArray = array [0..1] of TDayWeather;

procedure DayWeather (

var W: TDayWeatherArray;

var WeatherSize: integer

);

begin

W[1].TDay := 'Sunday';

W[1].TWeather := 'Sunny';

WeatherSize := 5;

end;

148

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The C++ main program,

DayWeatherMain.cc

#include <stdio.h>

#include <string.h>

struct TDayRec {

char TDay[9];

char TWeather[21];

};

extern "C" void DayWeather (

TDayRec [2],

int &);

int main(void)

{

struct TDayRec dr[2];

int NBytes;

char

s25[25];

t25[25];

NBytes = 0;

DayWeather (dr, NBytes);

strncpy (s25, dr[1].TDay, 6);

printf (" day = '%s' \n", s25);

strncpy (t25, dr[1].TWeather, NBytes);

printf (" weather = '%s' \n", t25);

}

The C++–Pascal Interface

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When you compile the Pascal

routine without the

-calignoption, the program

hostname% pc -c DayWeather.p

hostname% CC DayWeather.o DayWeatherMain.cc -lpc

hostname% a.out

does not work correctly.

day = ''

weather = ' Sun'

Compile with the -calign

option. The program now

works correctly.

hostname% pc -calign -c DayWeather.p

hostname% CC DayWeather.o DayWeatherMain.cc -lpc

hostname% a.out

day = 'Sunday'

weather = 'Sunny'

Arguments Passed by Value

C++ arguments can be passed by value. In this section, we describe how they

work with Pascal.

150

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Simple Types without the -xlOption

Without the -xloption, simple types match, as in the following example:

The Pascal procedure,

SimVal.p

procedure SimVal(

t, f: boolean;

c: char;

si:integer16;

i: integer;

sr:shortreal;

r: real;

var Reply: integer);

begin

Reply := 0;

if t then

Reply := Reply + 1;

if not f then

Reply := Reply + 8

if c='z' then

Reply := Reply + 64;

if si=9 then

Reply := Reply + 512;

if i=9 then

Reply := Reply + 4096;

if sr=shortreal(9.9) then

Reply := Reply + 32768;

if r=9.9 then

Reply := Reply + 262144;

end;

The C++–Pascal Interface

151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The C++ main program,

#include <stdio.h>

SimValMain.cc

extern "C" void SimVal(

char,

short,

int,

float,

double,

int &);

int main(void)

{

char

short

int

t = 1, f = 0, c= 'z';

si = 9;

i=9;

sr = 9.9;

float

double r =9.9;

int args;

SimVal (t, f, c, si, i, sr, r, args);

printf (" args = %07o \n", args);

return 0;

}

The commands to compile and

execute SimVal.pand

SimVal.cc

hostname% pc -c SimVal.p

hostname% CC SimVal.o SimValMain.cc -lpc

hostname% a.out

args = 111111

Function Return Values

Function return values match types in the same manner as with parameters.

They pass in much the same way.

152

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Simple Types

Simple types pass in a straightforward way, as in the following example:

The Pascal function,

function RetReal (r: real): real;

RetReal.p

begin

RetReal := r + 1

end;

The C++ main program,

#include <stdio.h>

RetRealMain.cc

extern "C" double RetReal (double);

int main(void)

{

double r, s;

r = 2.0;

s = RetReal (r);

printf (" %f \n", s);

}

The commands to compile and

execute RetReal.pand

RetRealMain.cc

hostname% pc -c RetReal.p

hostname% CC RetReal.o RetRealMain.cc -lpc

hostname% a.out

3.000000

The C++–Pascal Interface

153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Type shortreal

The Pascal function,

function RetShortReal (r: shortreal): shortreal;

RetShortReal.p

begin

RetShortReal := r + 1.0

end;

The C++ main program,

RetShortRealMain.cc

#include <stdio.h>

#include <math.h>

extern "C" float RetShortReal (float);

int main(void)

{

float r, s;

r = 2.0;

s = RetShortReal(r);

printf (" %8.6f \n", s);

}

The commands to compile and

execute RetShortReal.p

and RetRealMain.cc

hostname% pc -c RetShortReal.p

hostname% CC RetShortReal.o RetShortRealMain.cc -lpc

hostname% a.out

3.000000

Input and Output

The Pascal function, IO.p

procedure IO;

begin

writeln ('Hello, Pascal & St.Petersburg !');

end;

154

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The C++ main program,

#include <stdio.h>

IOMain.cc

extern "C" {

void IO ();

};

int main(void)

{

IO ();

printf ("Hello, C++ ! \n");

}

The commands to compile and

execute IO.pand IOMain.cc

hostname% pc -c IO.p

hostname% CC IO.o IOMain.cc -lpc

hostname% a.out

Hello, Pascal & St.Petersburg !

Hello, C++ !

Procedure Calls: Pascal–C++

A Pascal main program can also call C++ functions. The following examples

show you how to pass simple types and arguments and include the commands

that are used to compile and execute the ﬁnal programs.

Arguments Passed by Reference

Pascal arguments can be passed by reference. Here we discuss how they work

with C++.

The C++–Pascal Interface

155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Simple Types Passed by Reference

Simple types pass in a straightforward manner, as follows:

The C++ function, SimRef.cc

extern "C"

void SimRef (

char

int

&t,

&f,

&c,

&i,

short &s,

float &r,

double &d)

{

t = 1;

f = 0;

c = 'z';

i = 9;

s = 9;

r = 9.9;

d = 9.9;

}

156

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Pascal main program,

SimRefMain.p

program SimRefMain (output);

var

t, f: boolean;

c: char;

i: integer;

s: integer16;

r: shortreal;

d: real;

procedure SimRef (

var t, f: boolean;

var c: char;

var i: integer;

var s: integer16;

var r: shortreal;

var d: real

); external C;

begin

SimRef (t, f, c, i, s, r, d);

writeln (t, f: 6, c: 2, i: 2, s: 2, r: 4: 1, d: 4: 1);

end.

The commands to compile and

execute SimRef.ccand

SimRefMain.p

hostname% CC -c SimRef.cc

hostname% pc SimRef.o SimRefMain.p

hostname% a.out

true false z 9 9 9.9 9.9

Arguments Passed by Value

Pascal arguments can also be passed by value. Here is how they work with

C++.

The C++–Pascal Interface

157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Simple Types

Simple types match with value parameters. See the following example:

The C++ function, SimVal.cc

extern "C" void SimVal(

char t,

char f,

char c,

short si,

int

float sr,

double r,

int& Reply)

{

Reply = 0;

if (t)

if (! f)

if (c == 'z')

if (si == 9)

if (i == 9)

Reply +=

01;

010;

0100;

01000;

Reply += 010000;

if (sr == (float)9.9) Reply += 0100000;

if (r == 9.9) Reply += 01000000;

}

158

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Pascal main program,

SimValMain.p

program SimValMain(output);

var

t: boolean := true;

f: boolean := false;

c: char

:= 'z';

si:integer16:= 9;

i: integer := 9;

sr:shortreal:= 9.9;

r: real

:= 9.9;

args: integer;

procedure SimVal(

t, f: boolean;

c: char;

si:integer16;

i: integer;

sr:shortreal;

r: real;

var Reply: integer); external C;

begin

SimVal(t, f, c, si, i, sr, r, args);

writeln(' args = ', args :7 oct);

end.

The commands to compile and

execute SimVal.ccand

SimValMain.p

hostname% CC -c SimVal.cc

hostname% pc SimVal.o SimValMain.p

hostname% a.out

args = 111111

Function Return Values

Function return values match types in the same manner as with parameters.

They pass in much the same way.

The C++–Pascal Interface

159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following example shows how to pass simple types:

The C++ function, RetReal.cc extern "C"

double RetReal (double &x)

{

return (x + 1.0);

}

The Pascal main program,

program RetRealMain (output);

RetRealMain.p

var

r, s: real;

function RetReal (var x: real): real; external C;

begin

r := 2.0;

s := RetReal (r);

writeln ( r: 4: 1,' Return - ', s: 4: 1);

end.

The commands to compile and

execute RetReal.ccand

RetRealMain.p

hostname% CC -c RetReal.cc

hostname% pc RetReal.o RetRealMain.p

hostname% a.out

2.0 Return - 3.0

160

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Global Variables in C++ and Pascal

If the types are compatible, a global variable can be shared between C++ and

Pascal. See this example:

The Pascal procedure,

var

GloVar.p

Year: integer;

procedure GloVar;

begin

Year := 1995;

end;

The C++ main program,

GloVarMain.cc

#include <stdio.h>

extern "C" void GloVar ();

int Year;

int main(void)

{

Year = 2042;

GloVar ();

printf (" %d \n", Year);

}

The commands to compile and

execute GloVar.pand

GloVarMain.cc

hostname% pc -c GloVar.p

hostname% CC GloVar.o GloVarMain.cc -lpc

hostname% a.out

1995

The C++–Pascal Interface

161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pascal File Pointers to C++

You can pass a ﬁle pointer from Pascal to C++, then have C++ do the I/ O. See

this example.

The C++ procedure,

#include <stdio.h>

UseFilePtr.cc

extern "C"

void UseFilePtr (FILE* ptr)

{

fprintf (ptr, "[1] \n");

fprintf (ptr, "[2] \n");

fprintf (ptr, "[3] \n");

}

The C++ main program,

program UseFilePtrMain (output);

UseFilePtrMain.p

var

f: text;

cfile: univ_ptr;

procedure UseFilePtr (cf: univ_ptr); external C;

begin

rewrite (f, 'myfile.data');

cfile := getfile (f);

UseFilePtr (cfile);

end.

The commands to compile and

execute UseFilePtr.ccand

UseFilePtrMain.p

hostname% CC -c UseFilePtr.cc

hostname% pc UseFilePtr.o UseFilePtrMain.p

hostname% a.out

[1]

[2]

[3]

162

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TheFORTRAN–PascalInterface

This chapter describes how to mix FORTRAN 77 and Pascal modules in the

same program. It contains the following sections:

Compiler Mixed-Language Programs

Compatibility of Types for FORTRAN and Pascal

General Parameter-Passing in FORTRAN and Pascal

Procedure Calls: FORTRAN-Pascal

Procedure Calls: Pascal-FORTRAN

page 163

page 164

page 167

page 168

page 185

page 202

Routines as Parameters

Compiler Mixed-Language Programs

When you compile with the -v(verbose) option, the Pascal driver brings in the

runtime libraries for the main module.

However, when you compile a module that is not the main module, and which

is written in a language different from the main module, you must explicitly

bring in the runtime library on the command-line.

For example, you must use the compiler options –lpfcand –lpcwhen you

compile a FORTRAN main routine that calls Pascal. The –lpfcoption links

the common startup code for programs containing mixed Pascal and

FORTRAN object libraries. The –lpcoption includes the Pascal object library,

libpc.

163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specify –lpfcon the command-line before –lpc. For example:

hostname% pc -c my_pascal.p

hostname% f77 my_pascal.o my_fortran.f -lpfc -lpc

Sampmain.f:

MAIN:

The -coption to pcproduces an unlinked object ﬁle.

When you compile a Pascal main routine that calls FORTRAN, you must use

the compiler options –lpfcand –lF77. The –lF77option links the

FORTRAN object library, libf77.

You must specify -lpfcon the command-line before -lF77. For example:

hostname% f77 -c my_fortran.f

hostname% pc my_fortran.o my_pascal.p -lpfc -lF77

my_fortran.f:

MAIN:

You can omit the libraries if the foreign language module does not interact

with the runtime environment, that is, it does no I/ O, memory allocation, and

so on. However, there is no overhead to linking to an unused library;

therefore, always link in the appropriate runtime libraries, even if you think

you may not need them.

Compatibility of Types for FORTRAN and Pascal

Table 8-1 lists the default sizes and alignments of compatible types for

FORTRAN and Pascal.

164

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 8-1 Default Sizes and Alignments of Compatible Types (Pascal and FORTRAN)

Pascal Type

double

FORTRAN Type

double precision

real

Size (Bytes)

Alignment (Bytes)

longreal

real

single

shortreal

integer16

integer32

integer

-128..127

real

integer*2

integer*4

logical*1, byte, or

character

boolean

logical*1, byte, or

character

alfa

character*10

character

char

string

character*80

varying[n]

of char

structure / v/

integer*4

character*n

end structure

array

Same as element type

record

structure

Table 8-2 lists the default sizes and alignments of compatible types for

FORTRAN and Pascal with the -xloption:

Table 8-2 Sizes and Alignments of Compatible Types (Pascal and FORTRAN) with –xl

Pascal Type

real

FORTRAN Type

real

Size (Bytes)

Alignment (Bytes)

integer

integer*2

Precautions with Compatible Types

This section describes the precautions you must take when working with

character strings and array indexes.

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Character Strings

There are some precautions to take with character strings regarding the null

byte, passing by value, and static storage:

• Set the byte count to zero before calling Pascal with a null varying string,

because that is what Pascal assumes about such strings.

• Pass a structure consisting of a 4-byte integer and an array of characters

from FORTRAN to a Pascal procedure, expecting a varparameter that is a

variable-length string.

• Pass by reference by making the strings var, in, out, or in out

parameters.

• Set the string to constant because FORTRAN and Pascal each guarantees the

null byte only if the string is a constant. Neither of them relies on the null

byte, which is not required by the ISO Pascal Standard.

Array Indexes

The Pascal and FORTRAN array indexes can start at any integer; be sure they

match.

Incompatibilities

There are several incompatibilities between Pascal and FORTRAN variant

records, enumerated types, and set types.

Variant Records

In general, Pascal variant records require adjustment of alignment to match

with FORTRAN unions and structures.

Enumerated Types

Pascal enumerated types have no comparable type in FORTRAN.

166

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pascal Set Types

In Pascal, a set type is implemented as a bit vector, which is similar to a

FORTRAN 16-bit word. Direct access to individual elements of a set is highly

machine-dependent and should be avoided.

Multidimensional Arrays

Pascal multidimension arrays are incompatible with FORTRAN multi-

dimension arrays. Since Pascal arrays use row-major indexing, and FORTRAN

arrays use column-major indexing, an array passed in either direction appears

to be transposed.

General Parameter-Passing in FORTRAN and Pascal

A few general rules apply to passing parameters:

• By default, FORTRAN passes all parameters by reference.

• In FORTRAN, if you want to pass anything by value, then you must

explicitly use the nonstandard function %VAL().

• Pascal passes all parameters by value unless you explicitly state that they

are var, out, or inoutparameters, in which case they are passed by

reference.

• The routine options nonpascal, externfortran, and external

fortranpass by reference.

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Procedure Calls: FORTRAN-Pascal

Here are examples of how a FORTRAN main program calls a Pascal procedure.

The Pascal procedure, Samp.p.

Note the procedure deﬁnition.

The procedure name in the

procedure statement is in

procedure samp_(var i: integer; var r: real);

begin

i := 9;

r := 9.9

end; { samp_ }

lowercase with a trailing

underscore (_). This format is

required to match the conventions

of the FORTRAN compiler. var

parameters are used to match

FORTRAN defaults.

The FORTRAN main program,

Sampmain.f. Note the

integer i

double precision d

procedure declaration and call.

FORTRAN converts to lowercase

by default; you do not explicitly

give the underscore (_).

call Samp ( i, d )

write( *, '(I2, F4.1)') i, d

stop

end

The commands to compile and

execute Samp.pand

Sampmain.f

hostname% pc -c Samp.p

hostname% f77 Samp.o Sampmain.f -lpfc -lpc

Sampmain.f:

MAIN:

hostname% a.out

9 9.9

Variable Parameters

Pascal passes all varparameters by reference, FORTRAN’s default.

Simple Types without the –xlOption

With varparameters, simple types match.

168

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

See the following example:

The Pascal procedure,

SimVar.p

procedure simvar_(var t, f: boolean; var c: char;

var i: integer; var r: real;

var si: integer16; var sr: shortreal);

begin

t := true;

f := false;

c := 'z';

i := 9;

r := 9.9;

si := 9;

sr := 9.9

end; { simvar_ }

The FORTRAN main program,

SimVarmain.f

logical*1

character

integer*4

t, f

double precision d

integer*2

real

call SimVar ( t, f, c, i, d, si, sr )

write(*, "(L2,L2,A2,I2,F4.1,I2,F4.1)")

t, f, c, i, d, si,sr

stop

end

The commands to compile and

execute SimVar.pand

SimVarmain.f

hostname% pc -c SimVar.p

hostname% f77 SimVar.o SimVarmain.f -lpfc -lpc

SimVarmain.f:

MAIN:

hostname% a.out

T F z 9 9.9 9 9.9

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Simple Types with the –xlOption

When you pass the -xloption, the Pascal data type realmust be paired with

a FORTRAN data type real; the Pascal data type integermust be paired

with a FORTRAN data type, integer*2.

Strings of Characters

The FORTRAN counterpart to the Pascal alfaand stringtypes is a

character string, and the FORTRAN counterpart to the Pascal varyingis a

structure. By default, FORTRAN, passes all by reference:

The Pascal procedure,

type

StrVar.p

varstr = varying [25] of char;

procedure strvar_(var a: alfa; var s: string;

var v: varstr);

begin

a := 'abcdefghij';

s := 'abcdefghijklmnopqrtstuvwxyz';

v := 'oyvay'

end; { strvar_ }

The FORTRAN main program,

StrVarmain.f

structure /VarLenStr/

integer nbytes

character a*25

end structure

record /VarLenStr/ vls

character s10*10, s80*80, s25*25

vls.nbytes = 0

Call StrVar( s10, s80, vls )

s25(1:5) = vls.a(1:vls.nbytes)

write (*, 1) s10, s80, s25

format("s10='", A, "'",

/ "s80='", A, "'",

/ "s25='", A, "'" )

end

170

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute StrVar.pand

StrVarmain.f

hostname% pc -c StrVar.p

hostname% f77 StrVar.o StrVarmain.f -lpfc -lpc

StrVarmain.f:

MAIN:

hostname% a.out

s10='abcdefghij'

s80='abcdefghijklmnopqrtstuvwxyz

s25='oyvay'

Fixed Arrays

For a ﬁxed array parameter, pass the same type and size by reference, as

shown in the following example:

The Pascal procedure,

type

FixVec.p

VecTyp = array [0..8] of integer;

procedure fixvec_(var V: VecTyp; var Total: integer);

var

i: integer;

begin

Total := 0;

for i := 0 to 8 do

Total := Total + V[i]

end; { fixvec_ }

The FORTRAN main program,

FixVecmain.f

integer Sum

integer a(9)

data

a / 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 /

call FixVec ( a, Sum )

write( *, "( I3 )") Sum

stop

end

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute FixVec.pand

FixVecmain.f

hostname% pc -c FixVec.p

hostname% f77 FixVec.o FixVecmain.f -lpfc -lpc

hostname% a.out

FixVecmain.f:

MAIN:

The univArrays

You can pass any size array to a Pascal procedure expecting a univarray, but

there is no advantage in doing so, since there is no type or size checking for

separate compilations. However, if you want to use an existing Pascal

procedure that has a univarray, you can do so. All univarrays that are in,

out, in out,or varparameters pass by reference.

The Pascal procedure,

UniVec.p, which deﬁnes a 10-

element array

type

VecTyp = array [0..9] of integer;

procedure univec_(in V:univ VecTyp; var Last: integer;

var Total: integer);

var

i: integer;

begin

Total := 0;

for i := 0 to Last do

Total := Total + V[i]

end; { univec_ }

The FORTRAN main program,

UniVecmain.f, which passes

a 3-element array to the Pascal

procedure written to do a 10-

element array

integer Sum

integer a(0:2)

data

a / 7, 8, 9 /

call UniVec ( a, 2, Sum )

write( *, "( I3 )") Sum

stop

end

172

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute UniVec.pand

UniVecmain.f

hostname% pc -c UniVec.p

hostname% f77 UniVec.o UniVecmain.f -lpfc -lpc

UniVecmain.f:

MAIN:

hostname% a.out

Conformant Arrays

For conformant arrays, with single-dimension array, pass upper and lower

bounds, placed after the declared parameter list, as in:

function ip(var x:array[lb..ub:integer] of real):real;

...

double precision v1(10)

double precision z

z = ip ( v1, %VAL(0), %VAL(9) )

...

Pascal passes the bounds by value, so FORTRAN must pass them by value,

too.

One bounds pair may apply to several arrays if they are declared in the same

parameter group:

function ip(var x,y:array[lb..ub:integer] of real):real;

...

double precision v1(10), v2(10)

double precision z

z = ip ( v1, v2, %VAL(0), %VAL(9) )

...

Examples of single-dimension array and array of character conformant arrays

follow. Conformant arrays are included here only because they are a relatively

standard feature; there are usually more efﬁcient and simpler ways to do that.

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example 1: Single-Dimension Array

The Pascal procedure,

IntCA.p. Pascal passes the

bounds by value.

procedure intca_(var a:array[lb..ub: integer]ofinteger);

begin

a[1] := 1;

a[2] := 2

end; { intca_ }

The FORTRAN main program,

integer k

IntCAmain.f

integer s(0:2)

data

s / 0, 0, 0 /

call IntCA ( s, %VAL(0), %VAL(2) )

do k = 0, 2

write( *, "(I1)" ) s(k)

end do

stop

end

The commands to compile and

execute IntCA.pand

IntCAmain.f

hostname% pc -c IntCA.p

hostname% f77 IntCA.o IntCAmain.f -lpfc -lpc

IntCAmain.f:

MAIN:

hostname% a.out

Example 2: Array of Characters

The Pascal procedure,

ChrCA.p. Pascal passes the

bounds by value.

procedure chrca_(var a: array[lb..ub: integer]of char);

begin

a[0] := 'T';

a[13] := 'o'

end; { chrca_ }

174

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The FORTRAN main program,

character s*16

ChrCAmain.f

data s / "this is a string" /

call ChrCA( s, %VAL(0), %VAL(15) )

write( *, "(A)" ) s

stop

end

The commands to compile and

execute ChrCA.pand

CharCAmain.f

hostname% pc -c ChrCA.p

hostname% f77 ChrCA.o ChrCAmain.f -lpfc -lpc

ChrCAmain.f:

MAIN:

hostname% a.out

This is a string

Records and Structures

In most cases, a Pascal record describes the same objects as its FORTRAN

structure equivalent, provided that the components have compatible types and

are declared in the same order. The compatibility of the types depends mostly

on size and alignment.

For more information, see “Compatibility of Types for FORTRAN and Pascal”

on page 164.

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A Pascal record of an integer and a character string matches a FORTRAN

structure of the same. Consider these examples:

The Pascal procedure,

type

StruChr.p

lenstr =

record

nbytes: integer;

chrstr: array [0..25] of char

end;

procedure struchr_(var v: lenstr);

begin

v.chrstr := 'oyvay';

v.nbytes := 5

end; { struchr_ }

The FORTRAN main program,

StruChrmain.f

structure /VarLenStr/

integer nbytes

character a*25

end structure

record /VarLenStr/ vls

character s25*25

vls.nbytes = 0

Call StruChr( vls )

s25(1:5) = vls.a(1:vls.nbytes)

write ( *, 1 ) s25

format("s25='", A, "'" )

stop

end

The commands to compile and

execute Struchr.pand

StruChrmain.f

hostname% pc -c StruChr.p

hostname% f77 StruChr.o StruChrmain.f -lpfc -lpc

StruChrmain.f:

MAIN:

hostname% a.out

s25='oyvay'

176

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Variant Records

FORTRAN equivalents of variant records can sometimes be constructed,

although there is some variation with architecture, and sometimes you need to

adjust the alignment.

The Pascal procedure,

type vr = record

VarRec.p

case tag: char of

'a': ( ch1, ch2: char ) ;

'b': ( flag: boolean ) ;

'K': ( ALIGN: integer ) ;

end ;

procedure varrec_ ( var Rec: vr ) ;

begin

if ( Rec.ch1 = 'a' )

then Rec.ch2 := 'Z'

end; { VarRec.p }

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The FORTRAN main program,

VarRecmain.f. The variable

ALIGNis integer*2, and is

needed to match the Pascal

variant record layout.

structure /a_var/

character ch1, ch2

end structure

structure /b_var/

character flag

end structure

structure /c_var/

integer*2 ALIGN

end structure

structure /var_part/

union

map

record /a_var/ a_rec

end map

map

record /b_var/ b_rec

end map

map

record /c_var/ c_rec

end map

end union

end structure

structure /vrnt/

character tag

record /var_part/ var_rec

end structure

record /vrnt/ VRec

VRec.var_rec.a_rec.ch1 = 'a'

VRec.var_rec.a_rec.ch2 = 'b'

call varrec ( VRec )

write ( *, * ) VRec.var_rec.a_rec.ch2

stop

end

The commands to compile and

execute VarRec.pand

VarRecmain.fwithout –xl

hostname% pc -c VarRec.p

hostname% f77 VarRec.o VarRecmain.f

VarRecmain.f:

MAIN:

hostname% a.out

178

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pascal Set Type

The Pascal set type is incompatible with FORTRAN.

Pascal intsetType

The Pascal intsettype is predeﬁned as set of [0..127]. A variable of

this type takes a minimum of 16 bytes of storage.

The Pascal procedure,

IntSetVar.p, which has an

intsetof the elements

[1, 3, 7, 8]

procedure intsetvar_(var s: intset);

begin

s := [1, 3, 7, 8]

end; { intsetvar_ }

The FORTRAN main program,

IntSetVarmain.f

integer*2 s(8)

pointer ( ps, s )

ps = malloc(16)

call IntSetVar ( s )

do i = 5, 8

write( *, 1 ) s(i), i

end do

format(o3,1x, 'octal (word', i2, ')')

write( *, "('110 001 010 (binary, word 8)')")

write( *, "('876 543 210 (bit nos, word 8)')")

stop

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute IntSetVar.pand

IntSetVarmain.f. The

output of this example depends

on the architecture of your

machine.

hostname% pc -c IntSetVar.p

hostname% f77 IntSetVar.o IntSetVarmain.f -lpfc -lpc

IntSetVarmain.f:

MAIN:

hostname% a.out

0 octal

(word 5)

(word 6)

(word 7)

612 octal

(word 8)

110 001 010

876 543 210

(binary, word 8)

(bit nos, word 8)

Value Parameters

In general, Pascal passes value parameters on the stack.

Simple Types without the –xlOption

Without the -xloption, simple types match.

180

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

See the following example:

The Pascal procedure,

procedure simval_(t, f: boolean; c: char; i: integer;

SimVal.p. t, f, c, i, r, and s

are value parameters.

r: real; s: integer16; var reply: integer);

begin

reply := 0;

{ If nth arg is ok, set nth octal digit to one. }

if t then

reply := reply + 1;

if not f then

reply := reply + 8;

if c = 'z' then

reply := reply + 64;

if i = 9 then

reply := reply + 512;

if r = 9.9 then

reply := reply + 4096;

if s = 9 then

reply := reply + 32768

end; { simval_ }

The FORTRAN main program,

SimValmain.f

logical*1

character

integer*4

t, f

double precision d

integer*2

integer*4

args

data t / .true. /, f / .false. /, c / 'z' /

i / 9 /, d / 9.9 /, s / 9 /

call SimVal( %VAL(t), %VAL(f), %VAL(c),

%VAL(i), %VAL(d), %VAL(s), args )

write( *, 1 ) args

format('args=', o6, '(If nth digit=1, arg n OK)')

stop

end

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute SimVal.pand

SimValmain.f

hostname% pc -c SimVal.p

hostname% f77 SimVal.o SimValmain.f -lpfc -lpc

SimValmain.f:

MAIN:

hostname% a.out

args=111111(If nth digit=1, arg n OK)

Simple Types with the –xlOption

With the -xloption, match Pascal realwith FORTRAN realand Pascal

integerwith FORTRAN integer*2.

You can pass by value using the %VAL()feature of FORTRAN.

Type shortreal

Unlike C, there is no problem with passing shortrealvalue parameters

between Pascal and FORTRAN. They can be passed exactly as in the previous

example, with the Pascal shortrealtype matching the FORTRAN realtype.

Arrays

Since FORTRAN cannot pass arrays by value, it cannot pass strings of

characters, ﬁxed arrays, or univarrays by value.

Conformant Arrays

Although Pascal generally passes all value parameters on the stack, the

exception is value-conformant array parameters, which are handled by

creating a copy in the caller environment and passing a pointer to the copy. In

addition, the bounds of the array must be passed. See “Conformant Arrays”

on page 173.

This example is the same as the one in the earlier section, except that the var

preﬁx is deleted.

182

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pascal procedure, ChrCAx.p

procedure chrca_ ( a: array [lb..ub:integer] of char) ;

begin

a[0] := 'T' ;

a[13] := 'o' ;

end; { chrca_ }

The FORTRAN main program,

character s*16

ChrCAmain.f

data s / "this is a string" /

call ChrCA( s, %VAL(0), %VAL(15) )

write( *, "(A)" ) s

stop

end

The commands to compile and

execute ChrCAx.pand

ChrCAmain.f

hostname% pc -c ChrCAx.p

hostname% f77 ChrCAx.o ChrCAmain.f -lpfc -lpc

ChrCAmain.f:

MAIN:

hostname% a.out

This is a string

Pointers

Pointers are easy to pass, as shown in the following example:

The Pascal procedure,

type

PassPtr.p. In the Pascal

procedure statement, the name

must be all in lowercase, with a

trailing underscore (_).

PtrInt = ^integer ;

PtrReal = ^real ;

procedure passptr_ ( var iPtr: PtrInt ;

var dPtr: PtrReal ) ;

begin

iPtr^ := 9 ;

dPtr^ := 9.9 ;

end ;

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The FORTRAN main program,

PassPtrmain.f. In the

FORTRAN main program, the

nameisconvertedtolowercase.

Uppsercase is ignored.

program PassPtrmain

integer

double precision d

integer

iptr, dptr

pointer ( iPtr, i ), ( dPtr, d )

iPtr = malloc( 4 )

dPtr = malloc( 8 )

i = 0

d = 0.0

call PassPtr ( iPtr, dPtr )

write( *, "(i2, f4.1)" ) i, d

stop

end

The commands to compile and

execute PastPtr.pand

PassPtrmain.f

hostname% pc -c PassPtr.p

hostname% f77 PassPtr.o PassPtrmain.f -lpfc -lpc

PassPtrmain.f:

MAIN passptrmain:

hostname% a.out

9 9.9

Function Return Values

Function return values match types the same as with parameters, and they

pass in much the same way. See “Procedure Calls: FORTRAN-Pascal” on

page 168.

184

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Simple Types

The simple types pass in a straightforward way, as follows:

The Pascal function,

function retreal_(var x: real): real;

RetReal.p

begin

retreal_ := x + 1

end; { retreal_ }

The FORTRAN main program,

double precision r, s, RetReal

RetRealmain.f

r = 2.0

s = RetReal( r )

write( *, "(2f4.1)") r, s

stop

end

The commands to compile and

execute RetReal.pand

RetRealmain.fwithout –xl

hostname% pc -c RetReal.p

hostname% f77 RetReal.o RetRealmain.f -lpfc -lpc

RetRealmain.f:

MAIN:

hostname% a.out

2.0 3.0

Type shortreal

There is no problem with returning a shortrealfunction value between

Pascal and FORTRAN. As in the previous example, it can be passed exactly,

with the Pascal shortrealtype matching the FORTRAN realtype (without

-xl).

Procedure Calls: Pascal-FORTRAN

This section parallels “Procedure Calls: FORTRAN-Pascal” on page 168. The

comments and restrictions given in that section apply here, also.

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Variable Parameters

Pascal passes all varparameters by reference, the FORTRAN default.

Simple Types

Simple types pass in a straightforward manner, as follows:

The FORTRAN subroutine,

subroutine SimVar ( t, f, c, i, d, si, sr )

SimVar.f

logical*1

character

integer

t, f

double precision d

integer*2

real

t = .true.

f = .false.

c = 'z'

i = 9

d = 9.9

si = 9

sr = 9.9

return

end

186

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Pascal main program,

program SimVarmain(output);

SimVarmain.p

var

t, f: boolean;

c: char;

i: integer;

r: real;

si: integer16;

sr: shortreal;

procedure simvar(var t, f: boolean; var c: char;

var i: integer; var r: real;

var si: integer16; var sr: shortreal);

external fortran;

begin

simvar(t, f, c, i, r, si, sr);

writeln(t, f: 6, c: 2, i: 2, r: 4: 1, si: 2, sr: 4: 1)

end. { SimVarmain }

The commands to compile and

execute SimVar.pand

SimVarmain.p

hostname% f77 -c SimVar.f

SimVar.f:

simvar:

hostname% pc SimVar.o SimVarmain.p -lpfc -lF77

hostname% a.out

true false z 9 9.9 9 9.9

Strings of Characters

The alfaand stringtypes pass simply; varying strings are a little tricky. All

pass by reference.

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The FORTRAN subroutine,

StrVar.f

subroutine StrVar ( s10, s80, vls )

character s10*10, s80*80

structure /VarLenStr/

integer nbytes

character a*25

end structure

record /VarLenStr/ vls

character ax*10, sx*80, vx*5

data ax / "abcdefghij" /,

sx / "abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz" /,

vx / "oyvay" /

s10(1:10) = ax(1:10)

s80(1:80) = sx(1:80)

vls.a(1:5) = vx(1:5)

vls.nbytes = 5

return

end

The Pascal main program,

program StrVarmain(output);

StrVarmain.p

type

varstr = varying [25] of char;

var

a: alfa;

s: string;

v: varstr;

procedure strvar(var xa: alfa; var xs: string;

var xv: varstr); external fortran;

begin

strvar(a, s, v);

writeln(a);

writeln(s);

writeln(v);

writeln('length(v)= ', length(v): 2)

end. { StrVarmain }

188

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute StrVar.fand

StrVarmain.p

hostname% f77 -c StrVar.f

StrVar.f:

strvar:

hostname% pc StrVar.o StrVarmain.p -lpfc -lF77

hostname% a.out

abcdefghij

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz

oyvay

length(v)= 5

Character Dummy Arguments

When you call FORTRAN 77 routines with character dummy arguments from

Pascal programs—that is, routines in which string arguments are speciﬁed as

character*(*)in the FORTRAN source, there is no explicit analogue in

Pascal.

So, if you try to simply pass an actual string and specify the FORTRAN routine

as extern fortran, the program fails, because implementation of this type

of arguments implies that the actual length of the string is implicitly passed as

an extra value argument after the string pointer.

To specify this routine in Pascal, declare it as having two arguments: a VAR

argument of string type for the string pointer, and an extra value argument of

integer32type for the string length.

It is incorrect to specify the routine as extern fortranbecause Pascal passes

all arguments to FORTRAN routines by reference. Consequently, to pass this

type of argument, you must:

• Declare two arguments as described above, specifying the routine as simply

external(without the fortrandirective)

• Add a trailing underscore to the routine name in a Pascal program

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following example illustrates this method:

The Pascal program, sun.pas

program Test(input,output);

var

s : string;

procedure mygrout_(var prompt :string; length :integer32); external;

begin

writeln('Starting...');

s := 'Trio Jeepy';

mygrout_(s, 8);

writeln('Ending...')

end.

The FORTRAN subroutine,

mygrout.f

subroutine MyGrout(N)

character*(*)N

write(6,*) N

return

end

The commands to compile and

run this program

hostname% pc -g -c sun.pas

hostname% f77 -g sun.o mygrout.f -lpc

mygrout.f:

mygrout:

hostname% a.out

Starting...

Trio Jee

Ending...

190

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fixed Arrays

For a ﬁxed-array parameter, pass the same type and size by reference:

The FORTRAN subroutine,

FixVec.f

subroutine FixVec ( V, Sum )

integer Sum

integer V(0:8)

integer i

Sum = 0

do 2 i = 0, 8

Sum = Sum + V(i)

return

end

The Pascal main program,

program FixVecmain(output);

FixVecmain.p

type

VecTyp = array [0..8] of integer;

var

V: VecTyp := [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9];

Sum: integer;

procedure fixvec(var XV: VecTyp; var XSum: integer);

external fortran;

begin

fixvec(V, Sum);

writeln(Sum: 4)

end. { FixVecmain }

The commands to compile and

execute FixVec.fand

FixVecmain.p

hostname% f77 -c FixVec.f

FixVec.f:

fixvec:

hostname% pc FixVec.o FixVecmain.p -lpfc -lF77

hostname% a.out

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The univArrays

The univarrays that are in, out, in out, or varparameters pass by

reference.

The FORTRAN subroutine,

subroutine UniVec ( V, Last, Sum )

UniVec.f

integer V(0:2), Last, Sum, i

Sum = 0

do i = 0, Last

Sum = Sum + V(i)

end do

return

end

The Pascal main program,

program UniVec;

UniVecmain.p

type

VecTyp = array [0..9] of integer;

procedure univec(var V:univ VecTyp; in Last: integer;

var Sum: integer); external fortran;

var

Sum: integer;

V: array [0..2] of integer;

begin

V[0] := 7;

V[1] := 8;

V[2] := 9;

univec(V, 2, Sum);

writeln(Sum)

end. { UniVec }

192

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute UniVec.fand

UniVecmain.p

hostname% f77 -c UniVec.f

UniVec.f:

univec:

hostname% pc UniVec.o UniVecmain.p -lpfc -lF77

hostname% a.out

Conformant Arrays

Pascal-conformant array parameters are not compatible if Pascal calls

FORTRAN.

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Records and Structures

Records and structures pass as follows:

The FORTRAN subroutine,

StruChr.f

subroutine StruChr ( vls )

structure /VarLenStr/

integer nbytes

character a*25

end structure

record /VarLenStr/ vls

vls.a(1:5) = 'oyvay'

vls.nbytes = 5

return

end

The Pascal main program,

program StruChrmain;

StruChrmain.p

type

lenstr =

record

nbytes: integer;

chrstr: array [0..25] of char

end;

var

v: lenstr;

procedure struchr(var v: lenstr);

external fortran;

begin

struchr(v);

writeln('v.chrstr = "', v.chrstr, '"');

writeln('v.nbytes =', v.nbytes: 2)

end. { StruChrmain }

194

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute StruChr.fand

StruChrmain.p

hostname% f77 -c StruChr.f

StruChr.f:

struchr:

hostname% pc StruChr.o StruChrmain.p -lpfc -lF77

hostname% a.out

v.chrstr = "oyvay"

v.nbytes = 5

Variant Records

You can construct FORTRAN equivalents of variant records. There is some

variation with architecture, and sometimes you need to adjust the alignment.

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6, “The C–Pascal Interface,” has an example that matches the

following example.

The FORTRAN subroutine,

VarRec.f. The variable ALIGN

is integer*2and is needed to

match the Pascal variant record

layout.

subroutine VarRec ( VRec )

structure /a_var/

character ch1, ch2

end structure

structure /b_var/

character flag

end structure

structure /c_var/

integer*2 ALIGN

end structure

structure /var_part/

union

map

record /a_var/ a_rec

end map

map

record /b_var/ b_rec

end map

map

record /c_var/ c_rec

end map

end union

end structure

structure /vrnt/

character tag

record /var_part/ var_rec

end structure

record /vrnt/ VRec

if ( VRec.var_rec.a_rec.ch1 .eq. 'a' )

VRec.var_rec.a_rec.ch2 = 'Z'

return

end

196

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Pascal main program,

program VarRecmain;

VarRecmain.p

type

vr =

record

case tag: char of

'a': ( ch1, ch2: char );

'b': ( flag: boolean );

'K': ( ALIGN: integer )

end;

var

Rec: vr;

procedure varrec(var d: vr); external fortran;

begin

Rec.tag := 'a';

Rec.ch1 := 'a';

Rec.ch2 := 'b';

varrec(Rec);

writeln(Rec.ch2)

end. { VarRecmain }

The commands to compile and

execute VarRec.fand

VarRecmain.pwithout –xl

hostname% f77 -c VarRec.f

VarRec.f:

varrec:

hostname% pc VarRec.o VarRecmain.p -lpfc -lF77

hostname% a.out

Value Parameters

With externalfortranon the procedurestatement, Pascal passes value

parameters as FORTRAN expects them.

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Simple Types

With external fortran, the procedure name in the procedure statement

and in the call must be in lowercase, with no underscore (_).

The FORTRAN subroutine,

subroutine SimVal( t, f, c, i, d, s, reply )

SimVal.f

logical*1

character

integer*4

t, f

double precision d

integer*2

integer*4

reply = 0

if ( t

) reply = reply + 1

) reply = reply + 8

if ( .not. f

if ( c .eq. 'z' ) reply = reply + 64

if ( i .eq. 9 ) reply = reply + 512

if ( d .eq. 9.9 ) reply = reply + 4096

if ( s .eq. 9 ) reply = reply + 32768

return

end

198

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Pascal main program,

program SimVal(output);

SimValmain.p

var

t: boolean := true;

f: boolean := false;

c: char := 'z';

i: integer := 9;

r: real := 9.9;

s: integer16 := 9;

args: integer;

procedure simval(t, f: boolean; c: char; i: integer;

r: real; s: integer16; var reply: integer);

external fortran;

begin

simval(t, f, c, i, r, s, args);

writeln('args=',args:6 oct,'(Ifnth digit=1,arg n OK.)')

end. { SimVal }

The commands to compile and

execute SimVal.fand

SimValmain.p

hostname% f77 -c SimVal.f

SimVal.f:

simval:

hostname% pc SimVal.o SimValmain.p -lpfc -lF77

hostname% a.out

args=111111 (If nth digit=1, arg n OK.)

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pointers

Pointers are easy to pass, as shown in the following example:

The FORTRAN subroutine,

PassPtr.f. In the FORTRAN

subroutine, the name is

converted to lowercase.

Uppsercase is ignored.

subroutine PassPtr ( iPtr, dPtr )

integer

double precision d

pointer ( iPtr, i ), ( dPtr, d )

i = 9

d = 9.9

return

end

The Pascal main program,

PassPtrmain.p. In the

Pascal program, where it calls

the FORTRAN subroutine, the

name must be in lowercase.

program PassPtrmain;

type

PtrInt = ^ integer;

PtrReal = ^ real;

var

i: integer := 0;

r: real := 0.0;

iP: PtrInt;

rP: PtrReal;

procedure passptr(var xiP: PtrInt; var xrP: PtrReal);

external fortran;

begin

iP := addr(i);

rP := addr(r);

passptr(iP, rP);

writeln(i: 2, r: 4: 1)

end. { PassPtrmain }

200

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute PassPtr.fand

PassPtrmain.p

hostname% f77 -c PassPtr.f

PassPtr.f:

passptr:

hostname% pc PassPtr.o PassPtrmain.p -lpfc -lF77

hostname% a.out

9 9.9

Function Return Values

Function return values match types the same as with parameters, and they

pass in much the same way.

Simple Types

The simple types pass in a straightforward way, as in this example:

The FORTRAN function,

double precision function retreal ( x )

RetReal.f

retreal = x + 1.0

return

end

The Pascal main program,

program retrealmain;

RetRealmain.p

var

r, s: real;

function retreal(x: real): real; external fortran;

begin

r := 2.0;

s := retreal(r);

writeln(r: 4: 1, s: 4: 1)

end. { retrealmain }

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The commands to compile and

execute RetReal.fand

RetRealmain.p

hostname% f77 -c RetReal.f

RetReal.f

retreal:

hostname% pc RetReal.o RetRealmain.p -lpfc -lF77

hostname% a.out

2.0 3.0

Type shortreal

You can return a shortrealfunction value between Pascal and FORTRAN.

Pass it exactly as in the previous example, with the Pascal shortrealtype

matching the FORTRAN realtype (without -xl).

Routines as Parameters

If the passed procedure is a top-level procedure, write it as follows:

The FORTRAN subroutine,

subroutine PassProc ( r, s, prcdr )

PassProc.f

real r, s

external prcdr

call prcdr ( r, s )

return

end

202

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Pascal main program,

program PassProcmain;

PassProcmain.p

var

a, b: real;

procedure passproc(var u: real; var v: real;

procedure p(var r: real; var s: real));

external fortran;

procedure AddOne(var x: real; var y: real);

begin

y := x + 1

end; { AddOne }

begin

a := 8.0;

b := 0.0;

passproc(a, b, AddOne);

writeln(a: 4: 1, b: 4: 1)

end. { PassProcmain }

The commands to compile and

execute PassProc.fand

PassProcmain.p

hostname% f77 -c PassProc.f

PassProc.f

passproc

hostname% pc PassProc.o PassProcmain.p -lpfc -lF77

hostname% a.out

8.0 9.0

If the procedure is not a top-level procedure, then you do not deal with how to

pass it, because that requires allowing for the static link. A procedure or

function passed as an argument is associated with a static link to its lexical

parent’s activation record.

When an outer block procedure or function is passed as an argument, Pascal

passes a null pointer in the position normally occupied by the static link of the

passed routine. So that procedures and functions can be passed to other

languages as arguments, the static links for all procedure or function

arguments are placed after the end of the conformant array bounds pairs, if

any.

The FORTRAN–Pascal Interface

203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Routines in other languages can be passed to Pascal; a dummy argument must

be passed in the position normally occupied by the static link of the passed

routine. If the passed routine is not a Pascal routine, the argument is used only

as a placeholder.

204

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Error Diagnostics

This chapter discusses the errors you may come across while writing software

programs with Pascal. It contains the following sections:

Compiler Syntax Errors

Compiler Semantic Errors

Compiler Panics, I/O Errors

Runtime Errors

page 205

page 210

page 217

Note – Appendix B, “Error Messages,” lists in numerical order all the error

messages generated by Pascal.

Compiler Syntax Errors

Here are some common syntax errors in Pascal programs and the ways that the

compiler handles them.

Illegal Characters

Characters such as @are not part of Pascal. If they are found in the source

program and are not part of a string constant, a character constant, or a

comment, they are considered to be illegal characters. This error can happen if

you leave off a closing string quotation mark (').

205

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Most nonprinting characters in your input are also illegal, except in character

constants and character strings. Except for the tab and formfeed characters,

which are used to format the program, nonprinting characters in the input ﬁle

print as the character ?in your listing.

String Errors

Encountering an end-of-line after an opening string quotation mark (')

without ﬁrst encountering the matching closing quote yields the diagnostic:

Unmatched ' for string.

Also, anything enclosed in double quotes (for example, "hello") is treated as

a comment and is, therefore, ignored.

Programs containing #characters (other than in column 1 or in arbitrary-based

integers) can produce this diagnostic, because early implementations of Pascal

use #as a string delimiter. In this version, #is used for #includeand

preprocessor directives, and must be in column 1.

Digits in Real Numbers

Pascal requires digits in realnumbers before the decimal point. Thus, the

statements b := .075;and c := 05e-10;generate the following

diagnostics in Pascal:

Mon Feb 13 10:46:44 1995 digerr.p:

5 b:= .075;

e 18740-------------------^--- Digits required before decimal

point

6 c:= .05e-10

e 18740-------------------^--- Digits required before decimal

point

These constructs are also illegal as data input to variables in readstatements

whose arguments are variables of type real, single, shortreal, double,

and longreal.

206

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Replacements, Insertions, and Deletions

When Pascal encounters a syntax error in the input text, the compiler invokes

an error recovery procedure. This procedure examines the input text

immediately after the point of error and uses a set of simple corrections to

determine whether or not to allow the analysis to continue. These corrections

involve replacing an input token with a different token or inserting a token.

Most of these changes do not cause fatal syntax errors.

The exception is the insertion of or replacement with a symbol, such as an

identiﬁer or a number; in these cases, the recovery makes no attempt to

determine which identiﬁer or what number should be inserted. Thus, these are

considered fatal syntax errors.

The Pascal program,

synerr.p, which uses **as an

exponentiation operator

program synerr_example(output);

var i, j are integer;

begin

for j :* 1 to 20 begin

write(j);

i = 2 ** j;

writeln(i))

end

end. { synerr_example }

synerr.pproduces a fatal

syntax error when you compile it

because Pascal does not have

an exponentiation operator.

hostname% pc synerr.p

Mon Feb 13 10:56:19 1995 synerr.p:

3 var i, j are integer;

e 18460----------------^--- Replaced identifier with a ':'

for j :* 1 to 20 begin

E 18490-----------------^--- Expected keyword (null)

E 18460-----------------^--- Replaced ':' with a identifier

e 18480----------------------------^--- Inserted keyword do

i = 2 ** j;

e 18480---------------^--- Inserted keyword if

E 18480----------------------^--- Inserted identifier

e 18480-------------------------^--- Inserted keyword then

writeln(i))

e 18450-------------------------^--- Deleted ')'

Error Diagnostics

207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Undeﬁned or Improper Identiﬁers

If an identiﬁer is encountered in the input but is undeclared, the error recovery

mechanism replaces it with an identiﬁer of the appropriate class.

Further references to this identiﬁer are summarized at the end of the

containing procedure, function, or at the end of the program. This is the case if

the reference occurs in the main program.

Similarly, if you use an identiﬁer in an inappropriate way, for example, if a

typeidentiﬁer is used in an assignment statement, pcproduces a diagnostic

and inserts an identiﬁer of the appropriate class. Further incorrect references

to this identiﬁer are ﬂagged only if they involve incorrect use in a different

way. pcsummarizes all incorrect uses in the same way it summarizes uses of

undeclared variables.

Expected Symbols and Malformed Constructs

If none of the corrections mentioned previously appears reasonable, the error

recovery routine examines the input to the left of the point of error to see if

there is only one symbol that can follow this input. If so, the recovery prints a

diagnostic which indicates that the given symbol is expected.

In cases where none of these corrections resolve the problems in the input, the

recovery may issue a diagnostic that indicates “malformed” input. If

necessary, pccan then skip forward in the input to a place where analysis can

continue. This process may cause some errors in the missed text to be skipped.

See this example:

The Pascal program,

synerr2.p. Here outputis

misspelled, and ais given a

FORTRAN-style variable

declaration.

program synerr2_example(input,outpu);

integer a(10)

begin

read(b);

for c := 1 to 10 do

a(c) := b * c

end. { synerr2_example }

208

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

These are the error messages

you receive when you compile

synerr2.p. On line 6,

hostname% pc synerr2.p

Mon Feb 13 11:02:04 1995 synerr2.p:

3 integer a(10)

e 18480-------^--- Inserted '['

E 18490-----------------^--- Expected identifier

parentheses are used for

subscripting (as in FORTRAN),

rather than the square brackets

that are used in Pascal.

read(b);

E 18420----------------^--- Undefined variable

for c := 1 to 10 do

E 18420---------------^--- Undefined variable

a(c) := b * c

E 18420---------------^--- Undefined procedure

The compiler noted that awas

not deﬁned as a procedure

(delimited by parentheses in

Pascal). Since you cannot

assign values to procedure

calls, pcdiagnosed a

E 15010 line 1 - File output listed in program statement but not

declared

In program synerr2_example:

E 18240 a undefined on line 8

E 18240 b undefined on lines 6 8

E 18240 c undefined on lines 7 8

malformed statement at the

point of assignment.

Expected and Unexpected End-of-ﬁle

If pcﬁnds a complete program, but there is more (noncomment) text in the

input ﬁle, then it indicates that an end-of-ﬁle is expected. This situation may

occur after a bracketing error, or if too many ends are present in the input. The

message may appear after the recovery says that it Expected '.'because a

period (.) is the symbol that terminates a program.

If severe errors in the input prohibit further processing, pcmay produce a

diagnostic message followed by QUIT. Examples include unterminated

comments and lines longer than 1,024 characters.

The Pascal program, mism.p

program mismatch_example(output);

begin

writeln('***');

{ The next line is the last line in the file. }

writeln

Error Diagnostics

209

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When you compile mism.p, the

end-of-ﬁle is reached before an

enddelimiter

hostname% pc mism.p

E 26020-------^--- Malformed declaration

15130-------^--- Unexpected end-of-file - QUIT

Compiler Semantic Errors

The following sections explain the typical formats and terminology used in

Pascal error messages.

Format of the Error Diagnostics

In the example program above, the error diagnostics from the Pascal compiler

include the line number in the text of the program, as well as the text of the

error message. While this number is most often the line where the error

occurred, it can refer to the line number containing a bracketing keyword like

endor until. If so, the diagnostic may refer to the previous statement. This

diagnostic occurs because of the method the compiler uses for sampling line

numbers. The absence of a trailing semicolon (;) in the previous statement

causes the line number corresponding to the endor untilto become

associated with the statement.

As Pascal is a free-format language, the line number associations can only be

approximate and may seem arbitrary in some cases.

Incompatible Types

Since Pascal is a strongly-typed language, many type errors can occur, which

are called type clashes by the compiler.

The Pascal compiler distinguishes among the following type classes in its

diagnostics:

array

boolean

char

integer

pointer

real

scalar

string

varying

file

record

210

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Thus, if you try to assign an integervalue to a charvariable, you receive a

diagnostic as follows:

Mon Feb 13 13:16:20 1995 inchar.p:

E 25190 line 6 - Type clash: integer is incompatible with char

... 25560: Type of expression clashed with type of variable in assignment

In this case, one error produces a two-line error message. If the same error

occurs more than once, the same explanatory diagnostic is given each time.

The scalarClass

The only class whose meaning is not self-explanatory is scalar. It has a

precise meaning in the Pascal standard where it refers to char, integer, and

booleantypes as well as the enumerated types. For the purposes of the

Pascal compiler, scalarin an error message refers to a user-deﬁned

enumerated type, such as colorin:

type color = (red, green, blue)

For integers, the more precise denotation integeris used.

Procedure and Function Type Errors

For built-in procedures and functions, two kinds of errors may occur. If a

routine is called with the wrong number of arguments, a message similar to the

following is displayed:

Mon Feb 13 13:21:26 1995 sin.p:

E 10010 line 6 - Builtin function SIN takes exactly 1 argument

If the type of an argument is wrong, you receive a message similar to the

following:

Mon Feb 13 13:31:14 1995 abs.p:

E 10180 line 8 - Argument to ABS must be of type integer or real, not char

Error Diagnostics

211

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scalar Error Messages

Error messages stating that scalar (user-deﬁned) types cannot be read from and

written to ﬁles are often difﬁcult to interpret. In fact, if you deﬁne:

type color = (red, green, blue)

standard Pascal does not associate these constants with the strings red, green,

and bluein any way. Pascal adds an extension so that enumerated types can

be read and written; however, if the program is to be portable, you must write

your own routines to perform these functions.

Standard Pascal only allows the reading of characters, integers, and real

numbers from text ﬁles, including input(not strings or booleans). You can

make the following declaration:

file of color

However, the representation is binary rather than as strings, and it is

impossible to deﬁne inputas other than a text ﬁle.

Expression Diagnostics

The diagnostics for semantically ill-formed expressions are explicit, as the

following program shows. This program, expr.p, is admittedly far-fetched,

but illustrates that the error messages are clear enough so you can easily

determine the problem in the expressions.

212

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

program expr_example(output);

var

a: set of char;

b: Boolean;

c: (red, green, blue);

p: ^ integer;

A: alfa;

B: packed array [1..5] of char;

begin

b := true;

c := red;

new(p);

a := [];

A := 'Hello, yellow';

b := a and b;

a := a * 3;

if input < 2 then writeln('boo');

if p <= 2 then writeln('sure nuff');

if A = B then writeln('same');

if c = true then writeln('hue''s and color''s')

end. { expr_example }

This program generates the following error messages:

hostname% pc expr.p

Mon Feb 13 13:36:51 1995 expr.p:

E 13050 line 16 - Constant string too long

E 20070 line 17 - Left operand of and must be Boolean, not set

E 25550 line 18 - expression has invalid type

E 20030 line 18 - Cannot mix sets with integers and reals as operands of *

E 20240 line 19 - files may not participate in comparisons

E 20230 line 20 - pointers and integers cannot be compared - operator was <=

E 20220 line 21 - Strings not same length in = comparison

E 20230 line 22 - scalars and Booleans cannot be compared - operator was =

Error Diagnostics

213

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Type Equivalence

The Pascal compiler produces several diagnostics that generate the following

message:

non-equivalent types

In general, Pascal considers types to be the same only if they derive from the

same type identiﬁer. Therefore, the following two variables have different

types, even though the types look the same and have the same characteristics.

x : record

a: integer;

b: char;

end;

y : record

a: integer;

b: char;

end;

The assignment:

x := y

produces the following diagnostic messages:

Mon Feb 13 14:22:46 1995 inchar.p:

E 25170 line 12 - Type clash: non-identical record types

... 25560: Type of expression clashed with type of variable in assignment

214

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To make the assignment statement work, you must declare a type and use it to

declare the variables, as follows:

type

r = record

a: integer;

b: char;

end;

var

x: r;

y: r;

Alternatively, you could use the declaration:

x, y : record

a: integer;

b: char;

end;

The assignment statement then works.

Unreachable Statements

Pascal ﬂags unreachable statements. Such statements usually correspond to

errors in the program logic, as shown in the following example:

The Pascal program,

program unreached_example(output);

unreached.p

label

begin

goto 1;

writeln('Unreachable.');

writeln('Reached this.');

end. { unreached_example }

Error Diagnostics

215

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This error message is

generated when you compile

unreached.p.

hostname% pc unreached.p

Tue Feb 14 14:21:03 1995 unreached.p:

w 18630 line 8 - Unreachable statement

A statement is considered to be reachable if there is a potential path of control,

even if it cannot be taken. Thus, no diagnostic is produced for the statement:

if false then

writeln('Impossible!')

The gotoStatement

Pascal detects and produces an error message about gotostatements that

transfer control into structured statements—for example, forand while. It

does not allow such jumps, nor does it allow branching from the thenpart of

an ifstatement into the elsepart. Such checks are made only within the

body of a single procedure or function.

Uninitialized Variables

Pascal does not necessarily set variables to an initial value unless you explicitly

request that with the –Zoption. The exception is staticvariables, which are

guaranteed to be initialized with zero values.

Because variable use is not tracked across separate compilation units, pcdoes

nothing about uninitialized or unused variables in global scope, that is, in the

main program. However, pcchecks variables with local scope—those declared

in procedures and functions, to make sure they are initialized before being

used. pcﬂags uninitialized variables with a warning message.

Unused Variables, Constants, Types, Labels, and Routines

If you declare a variable, constant, type, procedure, or function in local scope

but never use it, Pascal gives you a warning message. It does not do this for

items declared in global scope because you can use the items in a separately

compiled unit.

216

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If you declare a label but never use it, Pascal gives you a warning. This is true

even for a label declared in global scope.

Compiler Panics, I/O Errors

One class of error that rarely occurs, but which causes termination of all

processing when it does, is a panic.

A panic indicates a compiler-detected internal inconsistency. A typical panic

message follows:

pc0 internal error line=110 yyline=109

If you receive such a message, compilation is terminated. Save a copy of your

program, then contact Sun Customer Support. If you were making changes to

an existing program when the problem occurred, you may be able to work

around the problem by determining which change caused the internal error

and making a different change or error correction to your program.

The only other error that aborts compilation when no source errors are

detected is running out of memory. Most tables in Pascal, with the exception

of the parse stack, are dynamically allocated, and can grow to take up a good

deal of process space. In general, you can get around this problem with large

programs by using the separate compilation facility. See Chapter 5, “Separate

Compilation,” for details.

If you receive an out of spacemessage during translation of a large

procedure or function, or one containing a large number of string constants,

either break the procedure or function into smaller pieces or increase the

maximum data segment size using the limitcommand of csh(1).

Runtime Errors

When Pascal detects an error in a program during runtime, it prints an error

message and aborts the program, producing a core image.

Following is a list of runtime errors that Pascal generates:

<ﬁlename> : Attempt to read from a file open for writing

<ﬁlename> : Attempt to write to a file open for reading

Error Diagnostics

217

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

<ﬁlename> : Bad data found on enumerated read

<ﬁlename> : Bad data found on integer read

<ﬁlename> : Bad data found on real read

<ﬁlename> : Bad data found on string read

<ﬁlename> : Bad data found on varying of char read

<ﬁlename> : Cannot close file

<ﬁlename> : Could not create file

<ﬁlename> : Could not open file

<ﬁlename> : Could not remove file

<ﬁlename> : Could not reset file

<ﬁlename> : Could not seek file

<ﬁlename> : Could not write to file

<ﬁlename> : File name too long (maximum of <number> exceeded

<ﬁlename> : File table overflow (maximum of <number>

exceeded)

<ﬁlename> : Line limit exceeded

<ﬁlename> : Non-positive format widths are non-standard

<ﬁlename> : Overflow on integer read

<ﬁlename> : Tried to read past end of file

<ﬁlename> : eoln is undefined when eof is true

Argument <number> is out of the domain of atan

218

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Argument to argv of <number> is out of range

Assertion #<number> failed: <assertion message>

Cannot close null file

Cannot compute cos(<number>)

Cannot compute sin(<number>)

Cannot open null file

Enumerated type value of <number> is out of range on output

Floating point division by zero

Floating point operand is signaling Not-A-Number

Floating point overflow

Floating point underflow

Illegal argument of <number> to trunc

Inexact floating point result

Integer divide by zero

Integer overflow

Internal error in enumerated type read

Invalid floating point operand

Label of <number> not found in case

Negative argument of <number> to sqrt

Non-positive argument of <number> to ln

Overflow/Subrange/Array Subscript Error

Error Diagnostics

219

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pointer value (<number>) out of legal range

Ran out of memory

Range lower bound of <number> out of set bounds

Range upper bound of <number> out of set bounds

Reference to an inactive file

Second operand to MOD (<number>) must be greater than zero

Statement count limit of <number> exceeded

Subrange or array subscript is out of range

Sun FPA not enabled

Unknown SIGFPE code

Unordered floating point comparison

Value of <number> out of set bounds

Varying length string index <number> is out of range

exp(<number>) yields a result that is out of the range of

reals

i = <number>: Bad i to pack(a,i,z)

i = <number>: Bad i to unpack(z,a,i)

pack(a,i,z): z has <number> more elements than a

substring outside of bounds of string

unpack(z,a,i): z has <number> more elements than a

220

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TheXViewToolkit

This chapter introduces the XView programmer’s toolkit, a part of the XView

application programmer’s interface (API). It assumes you are familiar with

XView windows as a user, and introduces XView from a programmer’s point

of view. For details, see the XView Programming Manual by Dan Heller,

O’Reilly & Associates, Inc., 1990.

The sections in this chapter are:

Overview

page 221

page 223

page 227

page 230

Pascal Interface

Conversion of C to Pascal

Sample Program

Note – Support for the XView toolkit will not be provided in future releases of

Pascal.

Overview

The XView API is an object-oriented, server-based, user-interface toolkit for the

X Window System Version 11 (X11). It is designed and documented to help

programmers manipulate XView windows and other XView objects. This

chapter focuses on using it with Pascal.

221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tools

This kit is a collection of functions. The runtime system is based on each

application having access to a server-based Notiﬁer, which distributes input to

the appropriate window, and a Window Manager, which manages overlapping

windows. There is also a Selection Service for exchanging data between

windows (in the same or different processes).

Objects

XView is an object-oriented system. XView applications create and manipulate

XView objects that are associated with XView packages. Objects in the same

package share common properties. The major objects are windows, icons,

cursors, menus, scrollbars, and frames. A frame contains non-overlapping

subwindows within its borders. You manipulate an object by passing a unique

identiﬁer or handle for that object to procedures associated with that object.

Object-Oriented Programming

Traditional programs are made up of procedures. When you need to operate

on some data, you pass the data to a procedure. This style of programming

can be referred to as procedure-oriented programming.

In object-oriented programming, the data are organized into objects, which are

similar to records in that an object can contain data ﬁelds of different types. In

addition to data, though, objects also have associated procedures, called

methods. The methods of an object generally perform all operations that can

be performed on the data of the object. When you need to operate on the data

in an object, you direct the object to do the operation. This is referred to as

sending a message to the object, and is similar to calling a procedure.

Each object is an instance of a given class. A class is much like a type in that it

deﬁnes a kind of object. Creating an instance of a given class is much like

declaring a variable of a given type, since creating an instance of a class creates

an object that has the properties and characteristics deﬁned for its class.

Classes are different from types in that a class can inherit data ﬁelds and

methods from another class. In fact, you always deﬁne a new class by

declaring it a subclass of some class. The new class is called a child or

descendant class; the old class is called a superclass, parent, or ancestor class.

A descendant can itself have descendants. Thus, classes form a tree structure,

222

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

with the root being the class from which all others are descended. In the

XView toolkit, the root is the class Generic Object, which has no data ﬁelds and

no methods. Each descendant of Generic Object is specialized in some way,

perhaps with additional data ﬁelds or methods.

What gives object orientation its power is that the inherited methods of a

subclass can be reimplemented so that they take actions suited to the subclass.

For example, consider a system that has three classes: Drawable Object,

Window, and Icon. Window and Icon are subclasses of Drawable Object. This

setup creates the hierarchical relationship illustrated in Figure 10-1.

Drawable

Object

Icon

Window

Figure 10-1 A Sample Class Hierarchy

Suppose that Drawable Object has a method that draws the object. Window

and Icon inherit that method, but each implements it in a different way.

Window deﬁnes a Draw method that draws windows; Icon deﬁnes a Draw

method that draws icons.

When you write your program, you can send a message to an object directing

it to draw itself without knowing whether, at runtime, the object is an icon or a

window. This method works because both Window and Icon are descendants

of Drawable Object. At runtime, the object that receives the method draws

itself using its class implementation of the Draw method.

Pascal Interface

To write XView applications in Pascal, you use special libraries, modules ﬁles,

object handles, and standard procedures.

The XView Toolkit

223

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Compiling with Libraries

Most XView procedures you call are in the libraries pxview, xview, and X11.

To compile an XView program, link the libraries, in order. For example:

hostname% pc my_pascal.p -lpxview -lxview -lolgx -lX11

Header Files

The header ﬁles deﬁne the necessary data types, constants, and external

procedures necessary to write programs using the XView interface with Pascal.

Names

The names of the header ﬁle are the same as the XView C language header ﬁles

with the .hextension changed to _p.h. For example, the Pascal header ﬁle

corresponding to the XView ﬁle panel.his named panel_p.h. Other header

ﬁles are canvas_p.h,text_p.h, and so on.

In addition to the header ﬁles corresponding to the XView headers, there is an

another one, stddefs_p.h.

This ﬁle deﬁnes some basic types that are used by most of the other Pascal

XView header ﬁles, and is included by the header ﬁles that need it.

Usage

To use header ﬁles with Pascal, put in includelines for any other header ﬁles

you need.

Attribute Procedures

Each class of objects has its own set of attributes. Each attribute has a

predeﬁned (default) value. For example, for the class of scrollbars, there is a

width and a color.

The standard C interface to XView deﬁnes two routines, xv_get()and

xv_set(), which get and set attributes of XView objects. These routines take

an arbitrary number and type of parameters and return various types,

depending on its arguments.

224

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instead of these routines, the Pascal interface to XView deﬁnes a separate

routine to get and set each attribute.

• set—The routine to set an attribute is called set_attrname. Each set

routine is a procedure, and takes as its ﬁrst argument the object for which

the attribute is being set. The second argument is the value of the attribute.

• get—The routine to get the value of an attribute is called get_attrname.

Each getroutine is a function, and takes an XView object as the ﬁrst

argument. It returns the value of the attribute requested.

For example:

set_WIN_SHOW ( frame, true );

width := get_CANVAS_WIDTH ( canvas );

These routines are deﬁned in the header ﬁle, attrgetset_p.h.

Attribute Lists

Some of the XView C routines can optionally take extra arguments that are lists

of attributes and values. The extra arguments vary in number and type. You

must pass a 0to the last argument of these routines.

Since Pascal does not support variable length argument lists, the Pascal

deﬁnition has a single argument.

Instead, special versions of these routines are provided which take as a last

argument an argument of type Attr_avlist. This type is a pointer to an

array of attributes and values. The special routines are:

xv_init_l(),

xv_create_l(),

xv_find_l(),

selection_ask_l(),

selection_init_request_l().

The XView Toolkit

225

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example calls are:

Here, mymenu is an object of

type XV_object.

mymenu := xv_create (NULL, MENU, 0);

ncols := get_MENU_NCOLS (mymenu);

set_MENU_NITEMS (mymenu, items);

xv_find_l (mymenu, MENU,

attr_create_list_2s (MENU_DEFAULT,4));

xv_destroy (mymenu);

The lists for Attr_avlistare created by functions that have the following

names:

attr_create_list_n()

attr_create_list_ns()

• The n indicates the number of arguments the routine accepts.

• The number of arguments can be 1-16.

• The routines ending in sreturn a pointer to a static attribute-value array,

which is reused with each call to the static list routines.

• The versions without the sreturn a dynamically allocated list, which should

be passed to xv_destroy()when you are ﬁnished with it.

Handles

When you create an XView object, xv_create()returns a handle for that

object. You pass this handle to the appropriate procedure for manipulating the

object.

Data Types

Each XView object has its own speciﬁc data type. The name of an object’s data

type always starts with a capital letter. For example, the data type for a

scrollbar is Scrollbar. The standard list of these types is in the header ﬁles.

226

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Coding Fragment

Here is an example that illustrates the style of programming with the XView

interface in Pascal. This program:

• Creates a vertical scrollbar with a view length of 100 pixels

• Changes the view length to 200 pixels

• Destroys the scrollbar

var bar, pi: Scrollbar;

begin

bar := xv_create ( 0, SCROLLBAR, 0 );

pi := xv_create_l ( 0, SCROLLBAR,

attr_create_list_4s ( SCROLLBAR_VIEW_LENGTH, 100,

SCROLLBAR_DIRECTION, SCROLLBAR_VERTICAL));

set_SCROLLBAR_VIEW_LENGTH( bar, 200 );

xv_destroy ( bar );

In this example:

• baris declared to be of type Scrollbar.

• xv_create()and xv_create_l()are invoked as functions.

• set SCROLLBAR_VIEW_LENGTH ()is invoked as a procedure.

• xv_destroy()is invoked as a procedure.

Conversion of C to Pascal

Here is an example of a problem that you may encounter when converting C to

Pascal. It recommends some changes that you can make to work around the

problem.

An Example

The Problem—Besides the six standard generic procedures, there are

approximately 80 other procedures, plus hundreds of attributes. These are all

documented in the XView Programming Manual. The problem is that all of the

coding is in C.

The XView Toolkit

227

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Straightforward Part—You can use the following items of information as

you ﬁnd them in the manual, with no change:

• The XView procedure names

• The XView object names

• The XView object data types (except Boolean, see the following section)

The More Complex Parts—You must make the following changes:

• Any elementary C data type used must be converted to the corresponding

Pascal data type.

• Any C procedure that returns something must be invoked in Pascal as a

function; otherwise, it must be invoked as a procedure.

• The XView type Booleanmust be converted to the Pascal type, boolean.

Table 10-1 shows you how to convert C declarations to Pascal.

Table 10-1 C Declarations to Pascal Declarations

Pascal

integer, subrange, or numeric constant

unsigned, subrange, or numeric constant

int

unsigned

short

integer16, subrange, or numeric constant

unsigned shortunsigned16, subrange, or nonnegative numeric constant

char

char(or single-letter string literal for special deﬁnition modules)

float

shortreal, longreal, or realconstant (always passed

as LONGREAL)

double

realor realconstant

any pointer type pointer type

any enumtype unsignedtype

any structtype recordtype of corresponding size and layout

char * array of charor string literal

other array types arraytype of corresponding size

1. Deﬁned in stddefs_p.h

228

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sample Translation of an XView Function to Pascal

In the section, “Summary of Procedures and Macros,” in the XView

Programming Manual, is the following entry:

texsw_insert()

Inserts characters in buf into textsw at the current

insertion point. The number of characters actually

inserted is returned. This will equal buf_len unless

there was a memory allocation failure. If there was

a failure, it will return 0.

Textsw_index

textsw_insert(textsw, buf, buf_len)

Textsw

char

int

textsw;

*buf;

buf_len;

If you translate the entry to Pascal, it means:

• Leave the object data type, Textsw, as is.

• Since the function returns the number of characters inserted, invoke it as an

integer function.

...

var

textsw: Textsw ;

buf: array[0..3] of char ;

buf_len: integer;

N:Textsw_index;

begin

...

N := textsw_insert (textsw, buf, buf_len) ;

end.

The XView Toolkit

229

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sample Program

The following program, xview.p, makes a window:

program hello(output);

#include "stddefs_p.h"

#include "attrgetset_p.h"

var

base_frame :Frame;

base_panel :Panel;

message

text

:Xv_panel_or_item_ptr;

:string;

begin

text := 'Hello, World!';

xv_init(0);

base_frame := xv_create(nil, FRAME, 0);

base_panel := xv_create(base_frame, PANEL, 0);

message

:= xv_create(panel, PANEL_MESSAGE, 0);

set_PANEL_LABEL_STRING(message, text);

window_main_loop(base_frame);

end. {hello}

To compile xview.pand link in the necessary libraries, use the following

command-line. Replace local_library_path with the path for the Pascal XView

libraries on your system.

hostname% pc -Ilocal_library_path xview.p -L$OPENWINHOME/lib \

-lpxview -lxview -lolgx -lX11

Now run the executable ﬁle:

hostname% a.out

Soon after you run the executable ﬁle, the window opens as a single frame,

with the string Hello, World!in the frame header.

230

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Demo Program

Here is a more complicated program, menu_demo.p, that makes a window

and a panel with a menu button. The choices displayed are: Option 1, Option2,

and Option 3.

program MenuDemo(output);

#include "stddefs_p.h"

#include "attrgetset_p.h"

var

base_frame

base_panel

button

: Frame;

: Panel;

: Panel_button_item;

: Menu;

frame_label : string;

button_label : string;

option1

option2

option3

: Cstringp;

procedure menu_proc(menu_: Menu; menu_item: Menu_item);

var

menu_string : Cstringp;

begin

menu_string := get_MENU_STRING(menu_item);

set_FRAME_RIGHT_FOOTER(base_frame, menu_string^);

end;

begin

frame_label := 'FRAME LABEL';

button_label := 'BUTTON LABEL';

new(option1); option1^ := 'OPTION 1';

new(option2); option2^ := 'OPTION 2';

new(option3); option3^ := 'OPTION 3';

xv_init(0);

The XView Toolkit

231

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

base_frame := xv_create(nil, FRAME, 0);

set_FRAME_LABEL(base_frame, frame_label);

set_FRAME_SHOW_FOOTER(base_frame, TRUE);

base_panel := xv_create(base_frame, PANEL, 0);

:= xv_create(nil, MENU, 0);

set_MENU_STRINGS_3(menu, option1, option2, option3);

set_MENU_NOTIFY_PROC(menu, addr(menu_proc));

button

:= xv_create(base_panel, PANEL_BUTTON, 0);

set_PANEL_LABEL_WIDTH(button, 200);

set_PANEL_LABEL_STRING(button, button_label);

set_PANEL_ITEM_MENU(button, menu);

window_main_loop(base_frame);

end. {menu_demo}

To compile menu_demo.pand link in the necessary libraries, use the following

command-line:

hostname% pc menu_demo.p -Ipascal_xview_include_path \

-Lpascal_xview_include_path -lpxview -lxview -lolgx -lX11

Now run the executable ﬁle:

hostname% a.out

232

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MathLibraries

This chapter describes how to use the libmand libsunmathfunctions in

Pascal programs. The math libraries are always accessible from a Pascal

program because the Pascal compiler driver pccalls ld, the linker and loader,

with the -lsunmath-lmoptions. If you compile Pascal program with the -v

option, it prints the command-line used to call each of the compilation passes.

For convenience, Pascal supports special Pascal header ﬁles, math_p.hand

sunmath_p.h, which contain prototypes of math functions, procedures, and

some useful constants. The math_p.hﬁle refers to sunmath_p.hby an

#includedirective.

This chapter contains the following sections:

Contents of the Math Libraries

libm Functions

page 234

page 235

page 236

page 238

page 239

page 240

page 242

IEEE Support Functions

SPARC Libraries

Arithmetic Exceptions

Math Library Exception-Handling Function: matherr()

libsunmath Support for IEEE Modes and Exceptions

233

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents of the Math Libraries

Altogether, there are three math libraries:

• libm.a—A set of functions required by the various standards to which the

operating system conforms

• libm.so—(Solaris 2.x only) The shared version of libm.a

• libsunmath.a—A set of functions not required by the standards, but are

of common use

Table 11-1 lists the contents of the math libraries.

Table 11-1 Contents of Math Libraries

Algebraic functions

Roots

m+, s

Euclidean distance

Transcendental functions

Elementary transcendental functions

Trigonometric functions

Trigonometric functions of radian arguments

Trigonometric functions of degree arguments

Trigonometric functions (scaled in Pi)

Trigonometric functions (with double precision Pi)

Hyperbolic functions

m+, s

Exponential, logarithm, power

Financial functions

Higher transcendental functions

Bessel

Gamma

Error function

m+,

Integral rounding functions

234

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 11-1 Contents of Math Libraries (Continued)

Random number generators

Additive pseudo-random generators

Linear pseudo-random generators

Random number shufﬂers

IEEE support functions

IEEE functions

IEEE test

IEEE values

IEEE sun

Control ﬂags

Floating-point trap handling

IEEE handling

Handling for speciﬁc SIGFPE codes (in libc)

Error handling function

Data conversion

BSD miscellaneous

Base conversion routines (in libc)

FORTRAN intrinsic functions

Legend:

Functions available in bundled libm

Functions available in bundled libmand as single-precision version only

in libsunmath

Functions available in unbundled libm(libsunmath)

libmFunctions

Most numerical functions are available in double- and single-precision version.

In general, the names of the single-precision version are formed by adding fto

the names of the double-precision version.

Math Libraries

235

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following Pascal program is an example of how to use math functions.

program TestLibm(output);

#include <math_p.h>

var

d0,d1,d2: double;

f0,f1,f2: single;

begin

d0 := 0.0; d1 := 1.0; d2 := 2.0;

f0 := 0.0; f1 := 1.0; f2 := 2.0;

writeln('Trigonometric functions');

writeln(sin(d0));

writeln(sinf(f0));

sincos(M_PI_2, d1, d2);

writeln(d1, d2);

sincosf(M_PI_2, f1, f2);

writeln(f1, f2);

writeln('Exponential, logarithm, power');

writeln(exp(d1));

writeln(log(d1));

writeln(pow(d1, d1));

writeln(expf(f1));

writeln(logf(f1));

writeln(powf(f1, f1));

end.

IEEE Support Functions

This section describes the IEEE support functions, including

ieee_functions(), ieee_values(), and ieeee_retrospective().

236

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ieee_functions()

The functions described in ieee_functions(3M) provide capabilities either

required by the IEEE standard or recommended in its appendix. Example:

program TestIEEEFunctions(output);

#include "math_p.h"

var

d1: double := 1.0;

d2: double := 2.0;

i1: integer := 1;

begin

writeln('IEEE functions');

writeln(ilogb(d1));

writeln(isnan(d1));

writeln(copysign(d1, d2));

writeln(fabs(d1));

writeln(fmod(d1, d1));

writeln(nextafter(d1, d1));

writeln(remainder(d1, d1));

writeln(scalbn(d1, i1));

end.

ieee_values()

IEEE values, such as inﬁnity, NaN, minimum and maximum positive ﬂoating-

point numbers, are provided by special functions described in the

ieee_values(3M) man page. Another example follows.

Math Libraries

237

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

program TestIEEEValues(output);

#include "math_p.h"

var

l0: integer32 := 0;

begin

writeln('IEEE values');

writeln(infinity);

writeln(signaling_nan(l0));

writeln(quiet_nan(l0));

writeln(max_normal);

writeln(max_subnormal);

writeln(min_normal);

writeln(min_subnormal);

end.

ieee_retrospective()

The libmfunction ieee_retrospective()prints to stderrinformation

about unrequited exceptions and nonstandard IEEE modes. Pascal programs

call ieee_retrospective()on exit by default.

SPARC Libraries

The libmand libsunmathlibraries also contain:

• Argument reduction functions, using inﬁnitely precise Pi and trigonometric

functions scaled in Pi

• Data conversion routines for converting ﬂoating-point data between IEEE

and non-IEEE formats

• Random number generators

There are two facilities for generating uniform pseudo-random numbers,

addrans(3M) and lcrans(3M). addransis an additive random number

generator; lcransis a linear congruential random number generator. In

addition, shufrans(3M) shufﬂes a set of pseudo-random numbers to provide

even more randomness for applications that need it.

238

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

program TestRandom(output);

#include "math_p.h"

var

n: integer := 100;

i: integer;

ilb,

{ Lower bound }

iub: integer; { Upper bound }

ia: array [1..100] of integer;

begin

writeln('Integer linear congruential random number generator');

ilb := I_LCRAN_LB;

iub := I_LCRAN_UB;

i_lcrans_(ia, n, ilb, iub);

for i := 1 to n do

writeln(ia[i]);

writeln('Integer additive random number generator');

ilb := minint;

iub := maxint;

i_addrans_(ia, n, ilb, iub);

for i := 1 to n do

writeln(ia[i]);

writeln('Integer random number shufflers');

i_shufrans_(ia, n, ilb, iub);

for i := 1 to n do

writeln(ia[i]);

end.

Arithmetic Exceptions

An arithmetic exception arises when an attempted atomic arithmetic operation

does not produce an acceptable result. The meaning of the terms “atomic” and

“acceptable” may vary, depending on the context.

Following are the ﬁve types of IEEE ﬂoating-point exceptions:

• Invalid operation—An operand is invalid for the operation about to be

performed.

Math Libraries

239

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Division by zero—The divisor is zero, and the dividend is a ﬁnite non-zero

number; or, more generally, an exact inﬁnite result is delivered by an

operation on ﬁnite operands.

• Overﬂow—The correctly rounded result is larger than the largest number in

the required precision.

• Underﬂow—The number is too small, or precision is lost, and no signal

handler is established for underﬂow.

• Inexact—The rounded result of a valid operation is different from the

inﬁnitely precise result. This exception occurs whenever there is untrapped

overﬂow or untrapped underﬂow.

Math Library Exception-Handling Function: matherr()

Some libmfunctions are speciﬁed to call matherr()when an exception is

detected. You can redeﬁne matherr()by including a function named

matherr()in the program. When an exception occurs, a pointer to the

exception structure, exc, is passed to the user-supplied matherr()function.

This structure, deﬁned in the math_p.hheader ﬁle, is as follows:

type

exception = record

kind: integer;

name: ^string;

arg1: double;

arg2: double;

retval: double;

end;

The element kind is an integer constant that describes the type of exception

that occurred, and is one of the following constants. These constants are

deﬁned in the header ﬁle.

240

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DOMAIN

SING

Argument domain exception

Argument singularity

OVERFLOW

UNDERFLOW

TLOSS

Overﬂow range exception

Underﬂow range exception

Total loss of signiﬁcance

Partial loss of signiﬁcance

PLOSS

If your matherr()function returns a non-zero result, no exception message is

printed, and errnois not set.

program TestMatherr(output);

#include <math_p.h>

function matherr(var info: exception): integer;

begin

case info.kind of

DOMAIN: begin

{ change sqrt to return sqrt(-arg1), not NaN }

if substr(info.name^, 1, length('sqrt')) = 'sqrt' then begin

info.retval := sqrt(-info.arg1);

matherr := 1; { No exception message will be printed }

end;

otherwise

matherr := 0;

end;

begin

writeln('Error handling function');

writeln('sqrt(-1)= ', sqrt(-1));

end.

Math Libraries

241

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

libsunmathSupport for IEEE Modes and Exceptions

ieee_handler()is used primarily to establish a signal handler for a

particular ﬂoating-point exception or group of exceptions.

The syntax of this function is described in the ieee_handler(3M) man page.

This following Pascal program demonstrates how to abort on division by zero.

program TestIEEEHandler(output);

#include <math_p.h>

procedure DivisionHandler(

sig: integer;

sip: univ_ptr;

uap: univ_ptr);

begin

writeln('Bad data - division by zero.');

end; { DivisionHandler }

var

FpAction, FpException: string;

Zero: integer := 0;

begin

FpAction := 'set';

FpException := 'division';

writeln(ieee_handler(FpAction, FpException,

addr(DivisionHandler)));

writeln('1/0 = ', 1 / Zero);

writeln(ieee_handler(FpAction, FpException, SIGFPE_DEFAULT));

writeln('1/0 = ', 1 / Zero);

end.

ieee_flags()is the recommended interface to:

• Query or set rounding direction mode

• Query or set rounding precision mode

• Examine, clear, or set accrued exception ﬂags

242

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The syntax of this function is described in the ieee_flags(3M) man page.

If an exception is raised at any time during program execution, then its ﬂag is

set, unless it is explicitly cleared. Clearing accrued exceptions is done by a call,

as shown in the following Pascal program.

program TestIEEEFlags(output);

#include "math_p.h"

var

FlAction, FlMode, FlIn: string;

FlOut: string_pointer;

Zero: integer := 0;

begin

writeln(sqr(-1));

writeln(1 / Zero);

{ Invalid operation }

{ Division by zero }

writeln(exp(709.8)); { Overflow }

writeln(exp(-708.5)); { Underflow }

writeln(log(1.1));

{ Inexact }

FlAction := 'clear';

FlMode := 'exception';

FlIn := 'all';

writeln(ieee_flags(FlAction, FlMode, FlIn, FlOut));

end.

Math Libraries

243

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

244

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PascalPreprocessor

This appendix describes the preprocessors, cpp(1) and cppas.

cpp

cpp(1) is the C language preprocessor. Pascal runs your source program

through cpp(1) when you compile it without the –xloption. For a complete

description of cpp(1), see the Solaris documentation.

cppas

The cppaspreprocessor handles the Pascal conditional variables and compiler

directives. You call cppasusing the –xloption.

Conditional Variables

A conditional variable is deﬁned when it appears in a %vardirective;

otherwise, it is undeﬁned. In addition, we predeﬁne:

__sun

__SVR4

sparc

unix

__sparc

__unix

__SUNPRO_PC=0x400

sun

These variables are not predeﬁned when you use -s0, -s1, -V0, or -V1.

245

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A defined conditional variable is enabled (true) when it appears in either the

%enabledirective or in the –configoption; otherwise, it is disabled (false),

as in:

%var one two

%enable two

The following section describes %varand %enable. Programs that contain

conditional variables must be compiled with the –xloption.

Compiler Directives

A directive indicates some action for the compiler to take. You can use a

directive anywhere in your program.

Each directive consists of a percent sign (%) followed by the directive name.

Programs that contain compiler directives must be compiled with the –xl

option.

Table A-1 summarizes the compiler directives.

Table A-1 cppasCompiler Directives

Compiler

Directive

Description

%config

Sets a special predeﬁned conditional variable with a value of either

trueor false.

%debug

%else

Instructs pcto compile this line of code when you use the -cond

compiler directive.

If expression in %ifexpression %thenis false, the compiler skips over

the %thenpart and executes the %elsepart instead.

%elseif

If expression in %ifexpression %thenis false, the compiler skips over

the %thenpart and executes the %elseifpart instead. Similar to

%else.

%elseifdef If expression in %ifdefexpression %thenis false, the compiler skips over

the %thenpart and executes the %elseifdefpart instead.

%enable

%endif

%error

Sets a conditional variable to true.

Indicates the end of an %ifor %ifdefdirective.

Prints a string on the standard output and treats it as an error.

246

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1 cppasCompiler Directives (Continued)

Compiler

Directive

%exit

%if

Description

Stops processing the current Pascal source ﬁle.

When the compiler encounters a %ifexpression %thendirective, it

evaluates expression. If expression is true, pcexecutes the statements

after %then. If expression is false, pcskips over %then.

%ifdef

Determines whether or not you previously deﬁned a conditional

variable in a %vardirective.

%include

%list

Inserts the lines from the speciﬁed ﬁle into the input stream.

Enables a listing of the program.

%nolist

Disables the program listing.

%slibrary Inserts the lines from the speciﬁed ﬁle into the input stream. Same as

%include.

%var

Deﬁnes conditional variables.

%warning

Prints a warning string on the standard output.

The rest of this appendix contains detailed descriptions and examples of each

directive.

The %configDirective

The %configdirective is a predefined conditional variable with a value of

either trueor false.

Syntax

%config

Comments

%configis truewhen you compile your program with the -configoption;

otherwise, %configis false.

Use %configin an %if, %ifdef, %elseif, or %elseifdefdirective to catch

any undefined values specified with -config. Do not define %configin the

%vardirective.

Pascal Preprocessor

247

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

The Pascal program,

config.p, which deﬁnes the

conditional variables oneand

two

program config_example(output);

{ This program demonstrates the use of the

%config compiler directive. }

var

a: integer := maxint;

b: integer := minint;

%var one two

begin

writeln('Begin program.');

%if one %then

writeln('One is defined as ', a:2, '.');

%elseif two %then

writeln('Two is defined as ', b:2, '.');

%elseif %config %then

writeln('Nothing is defined.');

%endif

writeln('End program.')

end. { config_example }

The output when you compile

config.pwithout the

-configoption

hostname% pc -xl config.p

hostname% a.out

Begin program.

End program.

The output when you deﬁne the

variable one

hostname% pc -xl -config one config.p

hostname% a.out

Begin program.

One is defined as 32767.

End program.

248

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The output when you deﬁne two

hostname% pc -xl -config two config.p

hostname% a.out

Begin program.

Two is defined as -32768.

End program.

The output when you deﬁne foo

hostname% pc -xl -config foo config.p

Fri Mar 3 15:22 1995 config.p

Error: –CONFIG command argument foo was never declared.

Compilation failed

The %debugDirective

The %debugdirective instructs pcto compile this line of code when you use

the –condcompiler directive.

Syntax

%debug;

Comments

The %debugdirective works in conjunction with the –condcompiler option.

–condcauses pcto compile the lines in your program that begin with

%debug. Without –cond, pctreats lines with %debugas comments.

Pascal Preprocessor

249

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

The Pascal program, debug.p

program debug_example(output);

{ This program demonstrates the use of the

%debug compiler directive. }

begin

writeln ('Hello, how are you?');

%debug; writeln ('Fine, thank you.');

end. { debug example }

The output when you compile

debug.pwithout the –cond

option

hostname% pc -xl debug.p

hostname% a.out

Hello, how are you?

The output when you use –cond hostname% pc -xl –cond debug.p

hostname% a.out

Hello, how are you?

Fine, thank you.

The %elseDirective

The %elsedirective provides an alternative action to the %ifdirective.

Syntax

%ifexpression %then

%else

%endif

250

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

The Pascal program,

program if_then_else (output);

if_then_else.p

%var red

begin

%if red %then

writeln ('It is red.');

%else

writeln ('It is not red.')

%endif

end.

The output when you compile

if_then_else.pwithout the

-config

hostname% pc -xl if_then_else.p

hostname% a.out

It is not red.

The output when you supply

-configwith the argument

red

hostname% pc -xl -config red if_then_else.p

hostname% a.out

It is red.

The %elseifDirective

The %elseifdirective provides an alternative action to the %ifdirective.

Syntax

%ifexpression %then

%elseifexpression %then

%endif

Pascal Preprocessor

251

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Comments

If the expression in %ifexpression %thenis false, pcskips over the %then

part and executes the %elseifpart instead. expression consists of a

conditional variable and the optional booleanoperators, and, or, and not.

See the %elselisting for examples of expression.

Example

The Pascal program,

program elseif_example(output);

elseif.p

{ This program demonstrates the use of the

%if, %then, and %elseif directives. }

%var blue red

begin

%if blue %then

writeln('The color is blue.');

%elseif red %then

writeln('The color is red.');

%endif

end. { elseif_example }

The output when you supply

-configwith the argument

blue

hostname% pc -xl -config blue elseif.p

hostname% a.out

The color is blue.

The output when you supply

-configwith the argument

red

hostname% pc -xl -config red elseif.p

hostname% a.out

The color is red.

The %elseifdefDirective

The %elseifdefdirective provides an alternative action to the %ifdef

directive.

252

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Syntax

%ifdefexpression %then

%elseifdefexpression %then

%endif

Comments

If the expression in %ifdefexpression %thenis false, pcskips over the

%thenpart and executes the %elseifdefpart instead. expression consists of a

conditional variable and the optional booleanoperators, and, or, and not.

See the %elselisting for examples of expression.

Example

The Pascal program, ifdef.p,

which ﬁrst checks if bird1has

been deﬁned. If not, it deﬁnes it

with a %vardirective. If bird1

has been deﬁned, the program

checks whether or not it needs

to deﬁne bird2.

program ifdef_example(output);

%include 'bird.h';

begin

%ifdef not(bird1) %then

%var bird1

%elseifdef not(bird2) %then

%var bird2

%endif;

%if bird1 %then

writeln('Bird one is a ', a, '.');

%elseif bird2 %then

writeln('Bird two is a ', b, '.')

%endif

end. { ifdef_example }

Pascal Preprocessor

253

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The includeﬁle, bird.h

var

a: array[1..7] of char := 'penguin';

b: array[1..6] of char := 'toucan';

%var bird1

The output when you enable

bird1with the -configoption

hostname% pc -xl -config bird1 ifdef.p

hostname% a.out

Bird two is a penguin.

The output when you enable

bird2with the -configoption

hostname% pc -xl -config bird2 ifdef.p

hostname% a.out

Bird two is a toucan.

The %enableDirective

The %enabledirective sets a conditional variable to true.

Syntax

%enablevar1 ..., varN

Comments

A deﬁned conditional variable is enable(true) when it appears in either the

%enabledirective or in the -configoption. Conditional variables are false

by default.

254

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

The Pascal program,

program enable_example(output);

enable.p. This example sets

the conditional variable twoto

true, which is equivalent to

setting the -configoption to

twoon the command-line.

{ This program demonstrates the use of

the %enable compiler directive. }

var

a: integer;

b: integer;

%var one, two

%enable two

begin

%if one %then

a := maxint;

writeln('One is defined as ', a:2, '.');

%endif

%if two %then

b := minint;

writeln('Two is defined as ', b:2, '.');

%endif

end. { enable_example }

The commands to compile and

output enable.p

hostname% pc -xl enable.p

hostname% a.out

Two is defined as -32768.

The %endifDirective

The %endifdirective indicates the end of a %ifor %ifdefdirective. See the

sections on %ifand %ifdeffor more information on this directive.

The %errorDirective

The %errordirective causes the compiler to print a string on the standard

output and treat it as an error.

Pascal Preprocessor

255

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Syntax

%error 'string'

Comments

pcdoes not produce an object ﬁle.

Example

The Pascal program, error.p

program error_example(output);

{ This program demonstrates the use of the

%error compiler directive. }

%var arch

begin

%if arch %then

writeln('This is a SPARC computer.');

%else

%error 'Unknown architecture.'

%endif

end. { error_example }

error.pproduces this error if

you compile it without the

–config sparcoption.

hostname% pc -xl error.p

Tue Feb 28 17:10 1995 error.p

Line 12 : %error 'Unknown architecture.'

E --------------------^---'Unknown architecture.'

Compilation failed

The %exitDirective

The %exitdirective instructs the compiler to stop processing the current

Pascal source ﬁle.

Syntax

%exit

256

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Comments

If the compiler encounters an %exitdirective within an includeﬁle, it stops

processing the includeﬁle, but continues processing the source ﬁle in which

it is included. In effect, %exitis equivalent to an end-of-ﬁle marker.

When the compiler processes an %exitdirective within an %ifor %ifdef

construct, it closes all %ifor %ifdefs before it stops processing the current

ﬁle.

Example

The Pascal program,

program exit_directive(output);

exit_directive.p

begin

writeln('Hello, world!')

end. { exit_directive }

%exit

Everything after the %exit is ignored.

So you can put anything here.

The commands to compile and

execute exit_directive.p

hostname% pc -xl exit_directive.p

hostname% a.out

Hello, world!

The %ifDirective

The %ifdirective is a conditional branching directive.

Syntax

%ifexpression %then

%end if

Pascal Preprocessor

257

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Comments

When pcencounters a %ifdirective, it evaluates expression. If expression is

true, pcexecutes the statements in the %thenpart. If expression is false, pc

skips over the %thenpart and executes the %else, %elseif, or %endif

directive. If no such directive exists, pcproceeds to the next statement.

The expression consists of a conditional variable and the optional boolean

operators and, or, and not. You can set a conditional variable on the

command-line by using the -configoption. See “–config” on page 27 for

information on this option.

Assuming oneand twoare conditional variables, expression can be any of the

following:

one

two

one and two

one or two

not one

not two

Example

See the example in the %elselisting on page 250.

The %ifdefDirective

The %ifdefdirective determines whether or not you previously deﬁned a

conditional variable in a %vardirective.

Syntax

%ifdefexpression %then

%elseifdefexpression %then

%endif

258

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Comments

expression consists of a conditional variable and the optional boolean

operators and, or, and not. See the %elselisting for examples of expression.

%ifdefis especially useful for determining whether or not a conditional

variable has been declared in an includeﬁle.

Example

See the example in “The %elseifdef Directive.”

The %includeDirective

The %includedirective inserts lines from the speciﬁed ﬁle in the input

stream.

Syntax

%include'ﬁlename';

Comments

When cppasencounters the %includedirective, it inserts the lines from the

ﬁle name into the input stream.

Example

The program unit,

include_prog.p

program include_prog;

%include 'extern.h';

begin

global := 1;

writeln('From MAIN, before PROC: ',global);

proc;

writeln('From MAIN, after PROC: ',global);

end. { include_prog }

Pascal Preprocessor

259

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The module unit,

module include_mod;

include_mod.p

define

global, proc;

%include 'extern.h';

procedure proc;

begin

writeln('From PROC

global := global + 1;

end; { proc }

: ',global);

The includeﬁle, include.h

var

global : integer;

procedure proc; extern;

The commands to compile and

execute ext_prog.pand

ext_mod.p

hostname% pc -xl include_prog.p include_mod.p

include_prog.p:

include_mod.p:

Linking:

hostname% a.out

From MAIN, before PROC:1

From PROC

: 1

From MAIN, after PROC:2

The %listDirective

The %listdirective enables a listing of the program.

Syntax

%list;

260

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Comments

The %listdirective and the -lcompiler option perform the same function.

Example

The Pascal program, list.p

program list_example(output);

{ This program demonstrates the use of the %list

and %nolist directives. }

%list;

%include 'types.h';

%nolist;

begin

pri := [red, yellow, blue];

pos := [true, false];

cap := ['A'..'Z'];

dig := [0..100];

writeln('Thereare ',card(pri):4,' primary colors.');

writeln('Thereare ',card(pos):4,' possibilities.');

writeln('There are',card(cap):4,' capitalletters.'');

writeln('There are ',card(dig):4,'digits.')

end. { list_example }

The includeﬁle, types.h

type

lowints = 0..100;

primary_colors = set of (red, yellow, blue);

possibilities = set of boolean;

capital_letters = set of 'A'..'Z';

digits = set of lowints;

var

pri: primary_colors;

pos: possibilities;

cap: capital_letters;

dig: digits;

Pascal Preprocessor

261

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The listing includes the time

each unit was compiled and the

name of each unit compiled.

hostname% pc -xl list.p

Tue Feb 28 15:48 1995 list.p:

6 %list;

Tue Feb 28 15:50 1995 ./types.h:

1 type

lowints = 0..100;

primary_colors = set of (red, yellow, blue);

possibilities = set of boolean;

capital_letters = set of 'A'..'Z';

digits = set of lowints;

8 var

pri: primary_colors;

pos: possibilities;

cap: capital_letters;

dig: digits;

Tue Feb 28 15:52 1995 list.p:

7 %include 'types.h';

hostname% a.out

There are

3 primary colors

2 possibilities

26 capital letters

101 digits

The %nolistDirective

The %nolistdirective disables the program listing.

Syntax

%nolist;

Comments

%nolistis the default.

Example

See the example under “The %list Directive.”

262

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The %slibraryDirective

cppastreats %slibrary in the same manner as the %includedirective. See

“The %include Directive” on page 259.

The %varDirective

The %vardirective deﬁnes conditional variables for the preprocessor.

Syntax

%varvar1 ..., varN

Comments

A conditional variable is deﬁned when it appears in a %vardirective;

otherwise, it is undeﬁned.

Example

See the example under “The %conﬁg Directive” on page 247.

The %warningDirective

The %warningdirective instructs pcto print a string on the standard output

as a compiler warning.

Syntax

%warning 'string'

Comments

pcproduces an object ﬁle.

Pascal Preprocessor

263

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

The Pascal program,

program warning_example(output);

warning.p

{ This program demonstrates the use of the

%warning compiler directives. }

%var blue

begin

%if blue %then

writeln('The color is blue.');

%else

%warning 'Color not defined'

%endif

end. { warning_example }

The output when you compile

warning.pwithout the

–configoption

hostname% pc -xl warning.p

Fri Mar 3 15:03 1995 warning.p

Line 12:%warning 'Color not defined'

w -------------------^----- 'Architecture not defined'

264

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Error Messages

The following is a list of the error messages produced by Pascal, arranged by

message number.

10010: Builtin <function> takes exactly <number> arguments

10020: Builtin <function> takes at least <number> arguments

10030: Builtin <function> takes at least <number> arguments

and at most <number>

10040: Built-in <function> cannot be passed as a parameter

10050: argv takes two arguments

10060: argv's first argument must be an integer, not <type>

10070: argv's second argument must be a string, not <type>

10080: Argument to card must be a set, not <type>

10090: flush takes at most one argument

10100: flush's argument must be a file, not <type>

10110: Not enough arguments to <function>

265

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10120: Too many arguments to <function>

10130: Actual argument cannot be conformant array

10140: Actual argument is incompatible with formal var

parameter <identiﬁer> of <function>

10150: Actual argument is incompatible with formal

<paramtype> parameter <identiﬁer> of <function>

10160: Actual argument to NONPASCAL procedure cannot be

conformant array

10170: Extra arguments to ADDR ignored

10180: Argument to <function> must be of type <type>, not

<type>

10190: Second argument to <function> must be of type <type>,

not <type>

10200: First argument to <function> must be of type <type>,

not <type>

10210: Illegal argument to IN_RANGE

10220: Type clash in argument to IN_RANGE

10230: Illegal argument to ADDR

10240: Third argument to <function> must be of type <type>,

not <type>

10250: Argument to ADDR is a dynamically allocated variable

<identiﬁer>

10260: Argument to ADDR is an internal variable <identiﬁer>

10270: Argument to ADDR is a nested function <function>

10280: Argument to ADDR is an internal procedure <function>

266

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10290: Fourth argument to <function> must be of type <type>,

not <type>

10300: First argument to <function> cannot be a univ_ptr

10310: <number> argument to <function> must be of type <type>,

not <type>

10320: <number> argument to <function> must be unpacked

10330: <number> argument to <function> must be packed

10340: <function> (line <number>) has <number> arguments

10350: Transfer functions take exactly one argument

10360: sizeof takes at least 1 argument

10370: Formal arguments should be given only in forward

declaration

10380: Types must be specified for arguments

10390: Each procedure/function argument must be declared

separately

10400: <function> takes no arguments

10410: <function> takes either zero or one argument

10420: <function> takes exactly one argument

10430: <function>'s argument must be integer or real, not

<type>

10440: seed's argument must be an integer, not <type>

10450: <function>'s argument must be a real, not <type>

10460: <function>'s argument must be an integer or real, not

<type>

Error Messages

267

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10470: ord's argument must be of scalar type, not <type>

10480: <function>'s argument must be of scalar type, not

<type>

10490: odd's argument must be an integer, not <type>

10500: chr's argument must be an integer, not <type>

10510: Argument to eoln must be a text file, not <type>

10520: Argument to eof must be file, not <type>

10530: Transfer functions take only one argument

10540: Arguments to <function> must be variables, not

expressions

10550: Read requires an argument

10560: Write requires an argument

10570: Message requires an argument

10580: null takes no arguments

10590: <function> expects one argument

10600: Argument to <function> must be a file, not <type>

10610: <function> expects one or two arguments

10620: First argument to <function> must be a file, not <type>

10630: Second argument to <function> must be a string, not

<type>

10640: <function> expects at least one argument

10650: (First) argument to <function> must be a pointer, not

<type>

268

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10660: Second and successive arguments to <function> must be

constants

10670: Argument to <function> must be a alfa, not <type>

10680: halt takes no arguments

10690: stlimit requires one argument

10700: stlimit's argument must be an integer, not <type>

10710: remove expects one argument

10720: remove's argument must be a string, not <type>

10730: linelimit expects two arguments

10740: linelimit's second argument must be an integer, not

<type>

10750: linelimit's first argument must be a text file, not

<type>

10760: page expects one argument

10770: Argument to page must be a text file, not <type>

10780: Assert expects one or two arguments

10790: Second argument to assert must be a string, not

<type>

10800: pack expects three arguments

10810: unpack expects three arguments

10820: Illegal transfer function argument

10830: constant argument expected

Error Messages

269

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10840: Illegal argument with format radix specification;

probably a comma missing

11010: have incompatible conformant array schemas

11020: sizeof(conformant array) is undefined

11030: Conformant arrays are not allowed at ANSI Level 0

11040: Subscripting allowed only on arrays, not on <type>s

11050: subrange value or array subscript (<integer>) is out

of range

11060: compiler takes size of array

11070: Elements of a packed array cannot be passed by

reference

11080: Subscripting allowed only on arrays and varying, not

on <type>s

11090: Varying size must be a constant

11100: Size of <identiﬁer> is zero

11110: Character array lower bound <> 1

11120: Character array upper bound of 1

11130: <function> requires a to be an unpacked array, not

<type>

11140: <function> requires z to be a packed array, not <type>

11150: <operation> not allowed on arrays - only allow = and

11160: Packed multidimensional conformant arrays are not

permitted

270

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11170: For-statement variable <identiﬁer> cannot be an element

of a record

11180: . allowed only on records, not on <type>s

11190: <identiﬁer> is not a field in this record

11200: Record required when specifying variant tags

11210: Missing case constants in variant record

11220: <identiﬁer> is a duplicate field name in this record

11230: Duplicate variant case label in record

11240: <operation> not allowed on records - only allow = and

11250: Variable in with statement refers to <identiﬁer>, not

to a record

11260: Too many tag fields

11270: No variant case label value equals specified

constant value

11280: Tag fields cannot be <type>s

11290: Bad variant constant

11300: variant required after case

12010: Assert expression must be Boolean, not <type>s

12020: illegal transfer function with <identiﬁer>

12030: Illegal transfer function

12040: Transfer functions on bit fields not implemented

12050: Oct/hex allowed only on writeln/write calls

Error Messages

271

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12060: Width expressions allowed only in writeln/write

calls

12070: Cannot write <type>s with two write widths

12080: Can't write <identiﬁer>s with oct/hex

12090: First write width must be integer, not <type>

12100: Second write width must be integer, not <type>

12110: Negative widths are not allowed

12120: Cannot write unpacked array to textfile

12130: Can't read <type>s from a text file

12140: Can't 'readln' a non text file

12150: Oct/hex allowed only on text files

12160: Write widths allowed only on text files

12170: Cannot write unpacked array to textfile

12180: Can't write <type>s to a text file

12190: Can't 'writeln' a non text file

13010: constant identifier required

13020: Constant value cannot be evaluated at compile-time

13030: Constant too large for this implementation

13040: <identiﬁer> is a constant and cannot be qualified

13050: Constant string too long

13060: Constant expression is required

272

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13070: constant argument expected

13080: newline in string or char constant

13090: empty character constant

13100: too many characters in character constant

14010: Constant declarations should precede type, var and

routine declarations

14020: Label declarations should precede const, type, var

and routine declarations

14030: Type declarations should precede var and routine

declarations

14040: All types should be declared in one type part

14050: All constants should be declared in one const part

14060: INTERNAL ignored, procedure was previously declared

PUBLIC or as EXTERNAL

14070: <function> has already been declared forward

14080: Unknown language <identiﬁer> in EXTERN procedure

declaration ignored

14090: Unresolved forward declaration of <function>

14100: <identiﬁer> DEFINED, but not declared

14110: label <identiﬁer> was declared but not defined

14120: PUBLIC procedures must be declared at outer block

level

14130: PRIVATE ignored, procedure was declared DEFINED

previously

Error Messages

273

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

14140: PUBLIC ignored, procedure was declared INTERNAL or

PRIVATE previously

14150: PRIVATE ignored, procedure was declared PUBLIC or as

EXTERNAL previously

14160: For-statement variable <identiﬁer> must be declared in

the block in which it is used

14170: All labels should be declared in one label part

14180: Expected identifier VARYING in declaration

14190: Variable declarations should precede routine

declarations

14200: All variables should be declared in one var part

14210: public vars must be declared at outer block level

14220: Declarations may not be both STATIC and PUBLIC,

STATIC is ignored

14230: Declarations may not be both DEFINE and PRIVATE,

DEFINE is ignored

14240: Declarations may not be both EXTERN and PRIVATE,

EXTERN is ignored

14250: <identiﬁer> was declared in a DEFINE, cannot be STATIC

14260: <identiﬁer> was declared in a DEFINE, cannot be PRIVATE

14270: <identiﬁer> used as both a field and a type name in a

record definition

14280: cannot DEFINE <identiﬁer>, variable was not previously

declared as EXTERN

14290: Declaration found when statement expected

274

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

14300: Expected keyword begin after declarations, before

statements

14310: Improper initialization for variable <identiﬁer>

14320: <identiﬁer> is already defined globally

14330: Definition of name <identiﬁer> after applied use in

<identiﬁer>

14340: Definition of name <identiﬁer> after applied use

14350: <identiﬁer> is already defined in this block

14360: Range lower bound exceeds upper bound

14370: '*' subrange descriptor used in illegal context

14380: Cannot initialize dynamic local variables

15010: File <identiﬁer> listed in program statement but not

declared

15020: File <identiﬁer> listed in program statement but

declared as a <identiﬁer>

15030: File <identiﬁer> listed in program statement but

defined as <identiﬁer>

15040: Files cannot be passed by value

15050: Files cannot be a component of <identiﬁer> passed by

value

15060: Pre-defined files input and output redefined

15070: Files cannot be members of files

15080: Missing closing <quote or bracket> for include file name

15090: Include filename must end in .i or .h

Error Messages

275

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15100: Cannot open #include file <ﬁlename>

15110: line <number> does not exist in file <identiﬁer>

15120: End-of-file expected - QUIT

15130: Unexpected end-of-file - QUIT

16010: <identiﬁer> is not a function

16020: Too many levels of function/procedure nesting

16030: No assignment to the function variable

16040: Functions should not return <type>s

16050: Procedure/function nesting too deep

16060: pcc_fvar(): no result for this function

16070: <identiﬁer> is a <class>, not a function

16080: Illegal function qualification

16090: compiler takes size of function

16100: Can't call <identiﬁer>, its not a pointer to a

procedure or function

16110: Can't qualify a function result value

16120: Cannot assign value to built in function

16130: INTERNAL option illegal for procedure pointer -

option ignored

16140: Unknown option for procedure pointer ignored :

16150: Too many levels of function/procedure nesting

276

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

16160: Procedure/function nesting too deep

16170: Can't call <identiﬁer>, its not a pointer to a

procedure or function

16180: Can't call <identiﬁer>, it's <class> not a procedure

16190: Procedure <identiﬁer> found where expression required

16200: Illegal procedure call, expecting value

16210: Non-pascal routine <identiﬁer> will fail if called

indirectly from pascal

16220: Passing nested routine <identiﬁer> to non-pascal

routine <identiﬁer>

16230: Can't call <identiﬁer>, its not a pointer to a

procedure or function

17010: Case label out of range

17020: Real constant out of range for this implementation

17030: Short real out of range for this implementation

17040: Short real <number> out of range for this

implementation

17050: Implementation restriction: sets must be indexed by

16 bit quantities

17060: Subscript of <identiﬁer> is out of range

17070: Subscript value of <number> is out of range

17080: subrange value or array subscript (<integer>) is out

of range

17090: Successor of <integer> is out of range

Error Messages

277

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

17100: Predecessor of <integer> is out of range

17110: Value of <integer> is out of range

17120: Range upper bound of <integer> out of set bounds

17130: Range lower bound of <integer> out of set bounds

17140: Value of <integer> out of set bounds

17150: value of <integer> (initial assign. to for loop

variable) is out of range

17160: Value of <integer> (terminal assign. to for loop

variable) is out of range

17170: Tag type is out of range

17180: Base out of range (2..36)

18020: (* in a (* ... *) comment

18030: { in a { ... } comment

18040: Comment does not terminate - QUIT

18050: Illegal character, use the -xl option to process %

compiler directives

18060: Illegal character

18070: unexpected EOF

18080: Point of error

18090: Parsing resumes

18100: Parse stack overflow

18110: Expression passed to UNIV formal <identiﬁer> was

converted to <type> of size <number> bytes

278

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18120: 8 or 9 in octal number

18130: Number too large for this implementation

18140: <operation> is undefined for reals

18150: <identiﬁer> cannot have more elements in z (<integer>)

than in a (<integer>)

18160: <identiﬁer> is an unimplemented extension

18180: Initializer must be a string

18190: Initialization string <string> is too long

18200: Expected 'options', not <identiﬁer>

18210: Unknown option ignored : <identiﬁer>

18220: Duplicate options specification : <identiﬁer>

18230: Unimplemented option ignored : <identiﬁer>

18240: <identiﬁer> undefined on line <number>

18250: <identiﬁer> improperly used on line <number>

18260: <identiﬁer> is neither used nor set

18270: <identiﬁer> is never used

18280: <identiﬁer> is used but never set

18290: Length of external label for identifier <identiﬁer>

exceeds implementation limit

18300: Applied use of <identiﬁer> before definition in this

block

18320: <operation> is forbidden for reals

Error Messages

279

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18420: Undefined <identiﬁer>

18430: Undefined identifier

18440: Improper <identiﬁer> identifier

18450: Deleted <token>

18460: Replaced <token> with a <token>

18470: Replaced <class> id with a <class> id

18480: Inserted <token>

18490: Expected <token>

18500: Label <identiﬁer> not defined in correct block

18510: Label <identiﬁer> redefined

18520: <identiﬁer> is undefined

18530: ^ allowed only on files and pointers, not on <type>s

18540: Pascal uses [] for subscripting, not ()

18550: Error occurred on qualification of <identiﬁer>

18560: division by 0

18580: Variable required in this context

18590: Universal pointers may not be dereferenced

18600: Illegal format

18610: Unknown format radix <identiﬁer> ignored, expecting hex

or oct

18620: Expression required

280

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18630: Unreachable statement

18640: Unrecoverable syntax error - QUIT

18650: Too many syntax errors - QUIT

18660: Input line too long - QUIT

18670: Unrecognizable # statement

18680: Include syntax error - expected ' or \" not found

18690: Absurdly deep include nesting - QUIT

18700: Too many levels of include nesting - QUIT

18710: Bad arbitrary base integer

18720: Bad base <number> number, <number>

18730: Digits required after decimal point

18740: Digits required before decimal point

18750: Digits required in exponent

18760: Space required between number and word-symbol

18770: Character/string delimiter is '

18780: Unmatched ' for string

18790: Null string not allowed

18800: Invalid preprocessed file (probably renamed as

'.p'). Compile the original .p file with -sb again

19010: Module name expected after keyword MODULE

19020: Identifiers after module name ignored

Error Messages

281

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

19030: Missing program statement

19040: Input is used but not defined in the program

statement

19050: Output is used but not defined in the program

statement

19060: Program parameter <identiﬁer> is repeated

20010: Left operand of <operator> must be integer, real or

set, not <type>

20020: Right operand of <operator> must be integer, real or

set, not <type>

20030: Cannot mix sets with integers and reals as operands

of <type>

20040: Operands of <operator> must be Boolean or Integer

20050: Left operand of / must be integer or real, not <type>

20060: Right operand of / must be integer or real, not

<type>

20070: Left operand of <operator> must be Boolean, not <type>

20080: Right operand of <operator> must be Boolean, not <type>

20090: Left operand of <operator> must be integer, not <type>

20100: Right operand of <operator> must be integer, not <type>

20110: Right operand of 'in' must be a set, not <type>

20120: Operands of + are of incompatible types

20130: Operand of <operator> must be integer or real, not

<type>

282

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

20140: Operands of <operator> must both be sets

20150: Set types of operands of <operator> must be compatible

20160: Incorrect statement usage const. with operand

20170: ^ allowed only on files and pointers, not on <type>s

20180: <operation> is an illegal operation on strings

20190: not must operate on a Boolean or Integer, not <type>

20200: not must operate on a Boolean, not <type>

20210: <operation> not allowed on pointers - only allow = and

20220: Strings not same length in <operator> comparison

20230: <identiﬁer>s and <identiﬁer>s cannot be compared -

operator was <operator>

20240: <identiﬁer>s may not participate in comparisons

21010: Attempt to pass IN parameter to formal reference

parameter

21020: Expression type clashed with type of value parameter

<identiﬁer> of <identiﬁer>

21030: Expression given (variable required) for var

parameter <identiﬁer> of <identiﬁer>

21040: Parenthesis not allowed for var parameter <identiﬁer>

of <identiﬁer>

21050: Parameter type not identical to type of var

parameter <identiﬁer> of <identiﬁer>

21060: Packed/unpacked type conflict between formal and

actual parameters

Error Messages

283

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

21070: Conformant array parameters in the same

specification must be the same type

21080: actual parameter is not an array

21090: array index type is incompatible with conformant

array parameter <identiﬁer>

21100: array index type is not within of index type of

conformant array parameter <identiﬁer>

21110: array index type is not within

range[<number>..<number>] of index type of conformant array

parameter <identiﬁer>

21130: <class> <identiﬁer> given for formal <class> parameter

<identiﬁer>

21140: does not match type of formal <class> parameter

<identiﬁer> (line <number>)

21150: <class> parameter <identiﬁer> of <identiﬁer> (line <number>)

21160: does not match <class> parameter <identiﬁer> of <identiﬁer>

(line <number>)

21170: Type of <class> parameter <identiﬁer> of <identiﬁer> (line

<number>)

21180: does not match type of <class> parameter <identiﬁer> of

<identiﬁer> (line <number>)

21190: Parameter congruity error: incompatible groupings

21200: Packed/unpacked type conflict between parameters of

<identiﬁer> and <identiﬁer>

21210: than formal <class> parameter <identiﬁer> (line <number>)

21220: Conformant array parameter bound symbol table entry

is NULL

284

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

21230: Program parameter <identiﬁer> is repeated

21240: Previous declaration for formal parameter '<identiﬁer>'

has different type

21250: Previous declaration for formal parameter '<identiﬁer>'

has different name '<identiﬁer>'

21260: Previous declaration for procedure '<identiﬁer>' had

different number of formal parameters

21270: Formal <class> <name> cannot be qualified

21280: <class> <name> cannot be qualified

21290: Expression given, <class> required for <class> parameter

<identiﬁer>

21300: Variable given, <class> required for <class> parameter

<identiﬁer>

21310: Cannot take value of OUT parameter

21320: Invalid assignment to a parameter marked as IN

21330: Parameter congruity error: incompatible groupings

21340: UNIV parameter <identiﬁer> should be passed as a var

parameter

21350: Fields which select variant parts may not be passed

by reference

21360: Cannot pass components of packed structures by

reference

21370: Cannot pass components of packed structures by VAR,

OUT, or IN/OUT

22010: Ran out of memory (gentypind)

Error Messages

285

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

22020: Ran out of memory (case)

22030: Ran out of memory (hash)

22040: Ran out of memory (TRIM)

22050: Ran out of memory (defnl)

22060: Ran out of memory (buffer_ir_pass)

22070: Ran out of memory (string)

22080: Ran out of memory (tralloc)

22090: out of memory (tstr)

22100: out of memory

22110: Ran out of hash tables

22120: Ran out of tree tables

22130: Out of space (put_on_idlist)

22140: out of tree space; try simplifying

22150: out of temporary string space

23010: <identiﬁer> is a non-standard function

23020: <identiﬁer> is a non-standard procedure

23030: Two argument forms of reset and rewrite are non-

standard

23040: NIL values in const declaration are non-standard

23050: Set constants in const declaration are non-standard

23060: Expressions in const declaration are non-standard

286

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

23070: Routine Options are not standard

23080: External procedures and functions are not standard

23090: Separately compiled routine segments are not

standard

23100: UNIV parameters are non-standard

23110: IN parameters are non-standard

23120: OUT parameters are non-standard

23130: IN OUT parameters are non-standard

23140: <identiﬁer> is a nonstandard function

23150: OTHERWISE clause in case statements is non-standard

23160: Ranges in case statements are non-standard

23170: Transfer functions are non-standard

23180: Reading scalars from text files is non-standard

23190: Writing <type>s with two write widths is non-standard

23200: Zero widths are non-standard

23210: Oct and hex are non-standard

23220: Writing <type>s to text files is non-standard

23230: <identiﬁer> is a nonstandard procedure

23240: Short-circuit operators are non-standard

23250: <operator> comparison on sets is non-standard

23260: record comparison is non-standard

Error Messages

287

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

23270: Storage Class non-standard

23280: Initialization in declaration part is non-standard

23290: UNIV_PTR types are non-standard

23300: '_' in an identifier is nonstandard

23310: Octal constants are non-standard

23320: <operator> is non-standard

24010: Cannot exit -- not within a loop

24020: For-statement variable <identiﬁer> must be unqualified

24030: For-statement variable <identiﬁer> cannot be an element

of a record

24040: For-statement variable <identiﬁer> may be illegally

changed at line <number>

24050: For-statement variable <identiﬁer> must be declared in

the block in which it is used

24060: For-statement variable <identiﬁer> cannot be <type>s

24070: Can't modify the for-statement variable <identiﬁer> in

the range of the loop

24080: Incorrect control variable

24090: Type of initial expression clashed with index type

in 'for' statement

24100: Type of limit expression clashed with index type in

'for' statement

24110: Can't modify the for variable <identiﬁer> in the range

of the loop

288

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

24120: Case selectors cannot be <type>s

24130: Duplicate otherwise clause in case statement

24140: Case label type clashed with case selector

expression type

24150: Multiply defined label in case, lines <number> and

24160: No case-list-elements

24170: Bad case constant

24180: Range in case label must be in ascending order

24190: Maximum number of case selectors exceeded

24200: Cannot next -- not within a loop

24210: Goto <label> is into a structured statement

24220: Goto <label> from line <number> is into a structured

statement

24230: Variable in with statement refers to <type>, not to a

record

24240: Maximum WITH nesting depth exceeded, ignoring WITH

variables

24250: Variable in with statement not correct

24260: cannot assign to lhs

24270: Variable required

24280: <class> <identiﬁer> found where variable required

24290: univ_ptr variable cannot be dereferenced in

assignment

Error Messages

289

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

24300: Improper use of the DEFINE statement

24310: End matched <keyword> on line <number>

24320: Inserted keyword end matching {begin|record|class}

on line <number>

25010: {pack|unpack}: elements of a and z must have the

same type

25020: component types of formal and actual arrays are not

conformable

25030: Type of function <name> (line <number>)

25040: Case label type clashed with case selector

expression type

25050: Type clash: initializer must be a pointer

25060: Type clash: type of initializer does not match type

of array

25070: Type clash: Integer is incompatible with real

25080: Type clash: Initializer out of range

25090: Type clash: real is incompatible with integer

25100: This resulted because you used '/' which always

returns real rather

25110: than 'div' which divides integers and returns

integers

25120: Type clash: non-identical scalar types

25130: Type clash: unequal length strings

25140: Type clash: varying char and unknown

290

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

25150: Type clash: packed and unpacked set

25160: Type clash: files not allowed in this context

25170: Type clash: non-identical <class> types

25180: Type clash: <type>s with file components not allowed

in this context

25190: Type clash: <type> is incompatible with <type>

25200: Type clash: string and unpacked array

25210: Type clash: string and packed array with lower bound

<> 1

25220: Type clash: Non-identical string types must be

packed

25230: Type clash: packed array with lower bound <> 1

25240: Set default type 'intset' is not a set

25250: Upper bound of element type clashed with set type in

constant set

25260: Lower bound of element type clashed with set type in

constant set

25270: Element type clashed with set type in constant set

25280: Set elements must be scalars, not <type>s

25290: Set of real is not allowed

25300: Procedures cannot have types

25310: Function type can be specified only by using a type

identifier

Error Messages

291

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

25320: Function type should be given only in forward

declaration

25330: Different type declared previously for function

return <name>

25340: Function type must be specified

25350: Type of expression in while statement must be

Boolean, not <type>

25360: Until expression type must be Boolean, not <type>, in

repeat statement

25370: Array index type incompatible with declared index

type

25380: Too many subscripts

25390: Bad type of variable used for call

25400: Transfer functions only work on types of the same

size

25410: Only type char allowed in varying array

25420: Type mismatch in read from non-text file

25430: Type mismatch in write to non-text file

25440: Specified tag constant type clashed with variant

case selector type

25460: Tag type is out of range

25470: Variant label type incompatible with selector type

25480: set types must be compatible in comparisons -

operator was <operator>

292

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

25490: <class> types must be identical in comparisons -

operator was <operator>

25500: Index type clashed with set component type for 'in'

25510: Operands of + are of incompatible types

25520: Type names (e.g. <type>) allowed only in declarations

25530: Type name (e.g. <type>) found in illegal context

25540: Set types of operands of <operator> must be compatible

25550: expression has invalid type

25560: Type of expression clashed with type of variable in

assignment

25570: Type of expression in if statement must be Boolean,

not <type>

25580: Type of transfer function does not match type of

right side

25590: <identiﬁer> is a <class>, not a type as required

25600: Set type must be range or scalar, not <type>

25610: Sets must have basetype with range <number>..<number>

25620: Subrange type cannot contain a expression

25630: Scalar types must be identical in subranges

25640: Can't mix <identiﬁer>s and <identiﬁer>s in subranges

25650: Subrange of real is not allowed

25660: Subrange bounds must be Boolean, character, integer

or scalar, not <type>

Error Messages

293

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

25670: Index type for arrays cannot be real

25680: Array index type is a <type>, not a range or scalar

as required

25690: Packed conformant array schema requires type

identifier as element type

25700: Illegal type in VARYING array, only type CHAR

allowed

25710: Size of <type> type exceeds implementation limits

25720: Initializer must be a constant value of same type

26010: Malformed program statement

26020: Malformed declaration

26030: Malformed const declaration

26040: Malformed type declaration

26050: Malformed var declaration

26060: Malformed record declaration

26070: Malformed statement in case

26080: Malformed statement

26090: Missing/malformed expression

26100: Label restricted to 4 digits

26110: Label declared non-integer

26120: Replaced unknown parameter specifier <identiﬁer> with

OUT

26130: Deleted ';' before keyword else

294

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

26140: Extension to WITH statement not allowed

27010: Integer overflow in constant expression

The following are internal error messages. If any of them is displayed, contact

Sun Customer Support.

18330: NAME with no symbol table entry

18340: ir_symbol: unknown class

18350: ir_leaf: cannot take address of op <identiﬁer>

18360: ir_leaf: illegal leaf node, op = <identiﬁer>

18370: ir_starg: illegal STARG

18380: ir_exit: no return label

18390: cannot take address of op <identiﬁer>

18400: op '<identiﬁer>' not implemented yet

18410: goal <integer> not defined for op <operation>

18570: wasted space: <number>

Error Messages

295

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

296

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

breaking a program into parts, 67

-bsdmallocoption to pccommand, 25

–aoption to pccommand, 24

buffering of program output,

controlling, 24

a.out, 2, 8, 9, 17

address parameters, 169

alignment of types in FORTRAN, 165

andoperator, 38

built-in function and procedure type

errors, 211

AnswerBook, xxii

arguments, See parameters

-Coption to pccommand, 25, 49

arithmetic exceptions in math

libraries, 239

–coption to pccommand, 26

C programming language, 89 to 134, 245

arrays by value, 114

arrays, conformant

parameters by value, 101, 114, 123,

193

C calls Pascal, 93 to 116

compatible types, 90

as(1) assembler, 40, 57

function return values, 115, 130

global variables in C and Pascal, 133

parameter passing, 93

parameters as pointers to

procedures, 131

assertstatement, 25

attributes for XView, 224

automatic replacement of errors, 207

Auto-Read

deﬁnition, 61

for dbx, disable, 61

Pascal

calls C, 117 to 132

interface, 89

procedures and functions as

parameters, 131

records and structures, 105, 124

sharing declarations, 88

strings by value, 114

–Boption to pccommand, 24

-boption to pccommand, 25

block buffering of program output, 25

booleanexpression, 36, 38

value parameters, 129 to 130

297

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

varparameters, 94, 117

%endif, 255

%error, 255

%exit, 256

%if, 247, 257

%ifdef, 255, 257, 258

%include, 259, 263

%list, 260

%nolist, 262

%slibrary, 263

%var, 247, 258, 263

%warning, 263

C++ programming language, 137 to 162

arguments, passing of

by reference, 139, 155

by value, 150, 157

arrays, ﬁxed, 144

C++ calls Pascal, 138 to 155

character strings, 142

compatible types, 138

compiler options, 137

function return values, 152, 159

functions, 155

global variables in C++ and

Pascal, 161

-lpcand -lcoptions, 137

name encoding, 138

parameter passing, 152

Pascal

compiler semantic errors, 210 to 217

can’t read and write scalars, 212

expression diagnostics, 212

function and procedure type

errors, 211

gotostatement, 216

incompatible types, 210

procedures and functions as

parameters, 211

calls C++, 155 to 160

ﬁle pointers to C++, 162

interface, 137

scalar, 211

records and structures, 146

value parameters, 158

type equivalence, 214

uninitialized variables, 216

unreachable statements, 215

unused item errors, 216

-calignoption to pccommand, 26

cg, the code generator, 18

compiler syntax errors, 205 to 209

digits in real numbers, 206

expected symbols, malformed

constructs, 208

–cg89option to pccommand, 26

–cg92option to pccommand, 26

character data type, 33, 46

characters, illegal, 205

expected, unexpected, end-of-ﬁle,

QUIT, 209

illegal characters, 205

replacements, insertions,

deletions, 207

compatible types

Pascal and C, 90

Pascal and C++, 138

Pascal and FORTRAN, 165

compiler, 8, 11, 17 to 66

driver, 18

string errors, 206

undeﬁned or improper

identiﬁers, 208

panics, 217

compiler directives, 246 to 263

#include, 67

compiling

a Pascal program, 8, 13

units, 69

%config, 247

%debug, 27, 249

%else, 250

%elseif, 251

%elseifdef, 252

%enable, 246, 254

with libraries, XView, 224

–condoption to pccommand, 27, 249

conditional

compilation, 27

variables, 246

298

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–configoption, 245, 252, 256

deﬁned, 246

undeﬁned, 245

variable, 76

definevariable, 82

diagnostics, format of, 210

digits in real numbers, 206

directives, See compiler directives

–dnoption to pccommand, 28

documentation, xxii to xxiii

DOMAIN Pascal, 27

%configdirective, 247

–configoption to pccommand, 27, 246,

252

conformant arrays

parameters between Pascal and

C, 101, 114, 123

parameters between Pascal and

C++, 152, 158, 159

–dryrunoption to pccommand, 28

–dyoption to pccommand, 28

parameters between Pascal and

FORTRAN, 182, 193

conventions, xxi

%elsedirective, 250

cpp

%elseifdirective, 251

%elseifdefdirective, 252

%enabledirective, 246, 254

%endifdirective, 255

end-of-ﬁle errors, 209

#includedirective, 67

the C preprocessor, 18, 27, 40, 49, 245

cppas, 245 to 263

compiler directives, 246 to 263

conditional variables, 245

preprocessor, 27, 40

enumerated types, 92, 166

equivalence of types, errors, 214

%errordirective, 255

error recovery, 207

the -xlpreprocessor, 18, 19

errors, 205 to 220

–Doption to pccommand, 27

–dalignoption to pccommand, 28

data type character, 33, 46

data types, XView, 226

automatic replacement, 207

from incompatible types, 210

from uninitialized variables, 216

from unreachable statements, 215

from unused items, 216

illegal characters, 205

in constructs, 208

dbx, 3, 31, 61

%debugcompiler directive, 27, 249

debugger, 3

in ends of program ﬁles, 209

in expressions, 212

in function and procedure types, 211

in gotostatement, 216

in identiﬁers, 208

in reading and writing scalars, 212

in real numbers, 206

in scalars, 211

in semantics, 210

in strings, 206

in symbols, 208

in syntax, 205

debugging

disable Auto-Read for dbx, 61

ﬁx-and-continue feature, 3

with dbx, 3

with –goption to pccommand, 31

declarations

define, 83

sharing between multiple units of

different languages, 87

#definestatement, 27

define

declaration, 83

Index

299

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

in type equivalence, 214

out of memory, 217

runtime, 217 to 220

interface, 163

procedures and functions as

parameters, 202 to 204

records and structures, 175, 194

sharing declarations, 88

strings by value, 182

value parameters, 181, 197

varparameters, 168, 186 to 197

exception-handling function in math

libraries, 240

executable ﬁle, 2, 9, 11, 18, 46

default, 9, 17

how to rename, 9

-fround=r option to pccommand, 29

-ftrap=t option to pccommand, 30

execution proﬁle, 39

%exitdirective, 256

function

expression diagnostics, 212

extended language features, 56

externoption, 86, 88

external, 88

return values with C, 115, 130

return values with FORTRAN, 184,

201

extern

option, 86, 88

variable, 76

externaloption, See externoption

type errors, 211

–fastoption to pccommand, 28

faster linking and initializing, 61

fbe(1) assembler, 40

-Goption to pccommand, 30

–goption to pccommand, 31

global variables

features, Pascal compiler, 2

C and Pascal, 133

C++ and Pascal, 161

ﬁle

name extensions, 20

variable, 12

gotostatement, compiler semantic

error, 216

-flagsoption to pccommand, 32

ﬂoating-point, nonstandard, 29

–fnonstdoption to pccommand, 29

-fnsoption to pccommand, 29

format of error diagnostics, 210

–Hoption to pccommand, 31, 49

handles, XView, 226

header ﬁles

FORTRAN programming language, 163

to 204

for XView, 224

in a program, 70

math libraries, 233

and Pascal, compatible types, 165

arrays by value, 182

character dummy arguments, 189

compatible types, 164

–helpoption to pccommand, 32

–hname option to pccommand, 31

FORTRAN calls Pascal, 168 to 185

function return values, 184, 201

incompatibilities with Pascal, 166

parameter passing, 167

–Ioption to pccommand, 32

–ioption to pccommand, 32

I/ O errors, 212, 217

Pascal

calls FORTRAN, 185 to 202

300

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

identiﬁer errors, 208

identiﬁers, 33, 46, 76

libobject library, 34

libmfunctions in math libraries, 235

libm.amath library, 234

IEEE support functions in math

libraries, 236

libm.somath library, 234

%ifdirective, 247, 257

–libmieeeoption to pccommand, 34

–libmiloption to pccommand, 34

%ifdefdirective, 255, 257, 258

illegal characters, 205

libraries

#includedirective, 67

%includedirective, 259, 263

compiling with XView, 224

creating, 74

libsunmathsupport in math

includeﬁle, 84, 257

and library header ﬁles, 74

as header ﬁle, 70

libraries, 242

libsunmath.amath library, 234

introduction, 67

licensing, 5

producing a listing of, 32

search order, 32

-noqueueoption, 5

queuing, 5

to break a program up, 67

status, 5

incompatible type errors, 210

inline(1)procedure call expander, 40

input, 10 to 13

-xlicinfooption, 5

line buffering, of program output, 24

linelimitprocedure, 25

linking units, 69

installation, xix

interface

%listdirective, 260

C++-Pascal, 137

C–Pascal, 89

FORTRAN-Pascal, 163

listing the Pascal program, 33

–llib option to pccommand, 34

locale language support, 5

logic errors, 215

internationalization, 4

iropt, 40

lowercase characters, 33, 46

-keeptmpoption to pccommand, 32

malformed construct errors, 208

keyword, 33, 46

manuals, See documentation

-Kpicand -KPICoptions to pc

math libraries, 233 to 243

arithmetic exceptions, 239

contents, 234

command, 39

function and procedure

prototypes, 233

IEEE support functions, 236

libmfunctions, 235

libm.a, 234

–Loption to pccommand, 33

-loption to pccommand, 33, 261

language support, See internationalization

ld(1) linker, 26, 34, 40

libm.so, 234

-Ldirectory option to pccommand, 33

Level 0 standard Pascal, 1, 46

Level 1 standard Pascal, 1, 46

libsunmathsupport, 242

libsunmath.a, 234

Index

301

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

matherr()exception-handling

function, 240

Pascal header ﬁles, 233

SPARC libraries, 238

–Poption to pccommand, 36, 38

–poption to pccommand, 39

panics, compiler, 217

memory, out of, 217

parameter passing

–misalignoption to pccommand, 34

C and Pascal, 93

C++ and Pascal, 152

FORTRAN and Pascal, 167

module

heading, 76

source ﬁles, 75

unit, 69

parameters

as pointers to procedures with C, 131

passed by address, 94, 168, 186, 197

passed by reference, 94, 168, 186, 197

passed by reference between C and

Pascal, 117 to 128

–mtoption to pccommand, 34

mvcommand, 9

passed by value

–nativeoption to pccommand, 35

-nocxoption to pccommand, 35

–noliboption to pccommand, 35

–nolibmiloption to pccommand, 35

%nolistdirective, 262

between Pascal and C, 129 to 130

between Pascal and C++, 152

between Pascal and

FORTRAN, 180, 197 to

202

value conformant array, 101, 114, 123,

193

value conformant array passed

between Pascal and

nonstandard ﬂoating point, 29

-noqueuelicensing option, 5, 35

Notiﬁer, XView, 222

-notraceoption to pccommand, 36

FORTRAN, 182

var, 95, 117 to 128, 168, 186 to 197

Pascal program

how to compile, 8, 13

how to list, 33

how to run, 9 to 13

how to write, 7

–Ooption to pccommand, 36

–ooption to pccommand, 9, 38

object code optimizer, 36

object ﬁle, 18

pccommand, 2, 7, 8, 11, 17 to 66

–aoption, 24

operating environment, See Solaris 2.x

operating system

–Boption, 24

–boption, 25

-bsdmallocoption, 25

–Coption, 25

–coption, 26

-calignoption, 26

–cg89option, 26

–cg92option, 26

–condoption, 27, 249

–configoption, 27, 246, 252, 256

–Doption, 27

operator

and, 38

or, 38

redirection (>), 11

options

order of processing, 23

to pccommand, 23 to 66

order of processing, options, 23

out of memory error, 217

output, 10 to 13

302

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–dalignoption, 28

–dnoption, 28

–dryrunoption, 28

–dyoption, 28

-Roption, 41

–Rpath option, 41

–Rwoption, 41

–Soption, 46

–fastoption, 28

-flagsoption, 32

–fnonstdoption, 29

-fnsoption, 29

-fround=r option, 29

-ftrap=t option, 30

-Goption, 30

-soption, 46

-s0and –s1options, 49

–sboption, 46

–sbfastoption, 46

-tcoption, 47

–tempoption, 47

–timeoption, 48

–Uoption, 49

–Goption, 30

–goption, 31

–Voption, 17

–Hoption, 31, 49

–helpoption, 32

–hname option, 31

–Ioption, 32

–voption, 49

–VOand –V1options, 49

–woption, 49

–xarch=a option, 49

–xcache=c option, 53

–xchip=c option, 54

–xFoption, 55

–xildoffoption, 56

–xildonoption, 56

–xloption, 56, 245

–xlibmoptoption, 57

–xlicinfooption, 57

–xMergeoption, 57

–xnolibmoptoption, 57

-xregs=r option, 60

-xsoption, 61

–ioption, 32

-keeptmpoption, 32

-Kpicand -KPICoptions, 39

–Loption, 33

–loption, 33, 261

-Ldirectory option, 33

–libmieeeoption, 34

–libmiloption, 34

list of options, 23 to 66

-llib option, 34

–misalignoption, 34

–mtoption, 34

–nativeoption, 35

-nocxoption, 35

–noliboption, 35

–nolibmiloption, 35

-noqueueoption, 35

-notraceoption, 36

–Ooption, 36

–ooption, 9, 38

–Poption, 36, 38

–poption, 39

-xsafe=memoption, 61

-xspaceoption, 62

–xtarget=t option, 62

–Zoption, 66

–ztextoption, 66

pc0, 18, 40

pc3, 18, 40

–pgoption to pccommand, 39

-PICoption to pccommand, 39

-picoption to pccommand, 39

pointer range checking, 31

–pgoption, 39

–PICoption, 39

preprocessor, 32

cpp(1), 27, 40

cppas, 27, 40

–picoption, 39

–Qoption, 40

-qpoption, 40

–Qpathoption, 40

–Qproduceoption, 40

privatevariable, 73, 80

Index

303

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

procedure

and function type errors, 211

–Soption to pccommand, 46

-soption to pccommand, 46

-s0and -s1options, 49

externoption, 86, 88

external, 88

linelimit, 25

type errors, 211

write, 46

–sboption to pccommand, 46

–sbfastoption to pccommand, 46

scalar errors, 211

program

breakup of a, 67

logic errors, 215

source ﬁles, 75

unit, 68

Selection Service, XView, 222

semantic errors, 210

separate compilation, 75 to 88

definevariable, 76

programming

externvariable, 76

module source ﬁles, 76

program source ﬁles, 76

object-oriented, 222

procedure-oriented, 222

publicvariable, 73, 80

separately compiled units, 68

set types, 93, 110, 167, 179

shared libraries, 24

sharing

–Qoptionto pccommand, 40

-qpoption to pccommand, 40

–Qpathoption to pccommand, 40

–Qproduceoption to pccommand, 40

queuing for a license, 5

routines among units, 76 to 88

variables among units, 71 to 73, 76 to

variables and routines across multiple

units

QUITerrors, 209

using definevariable, 82

using externvariable, 86

using includeﬁles, 78, 84

using public var

declarations, 80

-Roption to pccommand, 41

range check on pointers, 31

with –xl, 80

without –xl, 77

reading and writing scalars, errors in, 212

real numbers, errors, 206

shortreal, 154, 182

sizes of types, 165

records, variant, 108, 125, 195

redirecting input and output, 11 to 13

reference parameters, 94, 117, 128, 169

replacements in the case of errors, 207

–Rpath option to pccommand, 41

running a Pascal program, 9 to 13

runtime errors, 217 to 220

%slibrarydirective, 263

source

code, 40

ﬁle, 38

SPARC math libraries, 238

standard

input ﬁle, 10

–Rwoption to pccommand, 41

output ﬁle, 10

Pascal, Level 0 and 1, 1, 46

statement

304

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

#define, 27

assert, 25

uppercase characters, 33, 46

/usr/include, 32

stdin, 10

stdout, 10

string errors, 206

-Voption to pccommand, 17

symbol

–voption to pccommand, 49

errors, 208

table for dbx, 61

value conformant array parameters, 101,

114, 123, 182, 193

syntax errors and recovery, 205 to 207

value parameters

with C, 129, 130

with C++, 152

with FORTRAN, 181, 197

-tcoption to pccommand, 47

%vardirective, 247, 258, 263

tcov(1) utility, 24

variable

–tempoption to pccommand, 47

conditional, 27, 246

define, 82

initialization of and errors, 216

parameters, 94

with C, 117, 128

with C++, 161

with FORTRAN, 168

private, 73, 80

public, 73, 80

text editor

textedit, 3

vi, 3

–timeoption to pccommand, 48

type

equivalence, errors, 214

shortreal, 154, 182

sizes, See sizes of types

types

variables and routines, sharing across

multiple units

compatible in C and Pascal, 90

compatible in C++ and Pascal, 138

compatible in FORTRAN and

Pascal, 165

enumerated, 92, 166

incompatible, 210

using define

variable, 82

using definedeclaration, 83

using externvariable, 86

using includeﬁles, 78, 84

using public vardeclarations, 80

without –xl, 77

set, 93, 110, 167, 179

variant records, 108, 125, 195

vitext editor, 3

–Uoption to pccommand, 49

–VOand –V1options to pccommand, 49

uninitialized variable error, 216

units

compiling and linking, 69

introductory information, 67 to 73

separately compiled, 68

sharing routines, 76 to 88

sharing variables, 71 to 73, 76 to 86

–woption to pccommand, 49

%warningdirective, 263

warning diagnostic, 49

Window Manager, XView, 222

writeprocedure, 46

unreachable statements, errors, 215

unused item errors, 216

Index

305

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

writing a Pascal program, 7

writing scalars, errors in, 212

–xarch=a option to pccommand, 49

–xcache=a option to pccommand, 53

–xchip=c option to pccommand, 54

–xFoption to pccommand, 55

–xildoffoption to pccommand, 56

–xildonoption to pccommand, 56

–xloption to pccommand, 56, 245

–xlibmoptoption to pccommand, 57

-xlicinfolicensing option, 5

–xlicinfooption to pccommand, 57

–xMergeoption to pccommand, 57

–xnolibmoptoption to pccommand, 57

-xregs=r option to pccommand, 60

-xsoption to pccommand, 61

-xsafe=memoption to pccommand, 61

-xspaceoption to pccommand, 62

–xtarget=t option to pccommand, 62

XView

attributes, 224

data types, 226

documentation, 221

handles, 226

header ﬁles, 224

introduction, 3

Notiﬁer, 222

Selection Service, 222

Window Manager, 222

–Zoption to pccommand, 66

–ztextoption to pccommand, 66

306

Pascal 4.0 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

307

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

l’utilisation, la copie, et la décompliation. Aucune partie de ce produit ou de sa documentation associée ne peuvent Être

reproduits sous aucune forme, par quelque moyen que ce soit sans l’autorisation préalable et écrite de Sun et de ses bailleurs de

licence, s’il en a.

Des parties de ce produit pourront etre derivees du système UNIX^®, licencié par UNIX System Laboratories Inc., ﬁliale

entierement detenue par Novell, Inc. ainsi que par le système 4.3. de Berkeley, licencié par l’Université de Californie. Le logiciel

détenu par des tiers, et qui comprend la technologie relative aux polices de caractères, est protégé par un copyright et licencié par

des fourmisseurs de Sun.

LEGENDE RELATIVE AUX DROITS RESTREINTS: l’utilisation, la duplication ou la divulgation par l’administration

americaine sont soumises aux restrictions visées a l’alinéa (c)(1)(ii) de la clause relative aux droits des données techniques et aux

logiciels informatiques du DFARS 252.227-7013 et FAR 52.227-19. Le produit décrit dans ce manuel peut Être protege par un ou

plusieurs brevet(s) americain(s), etranger(s) ou par des demandes en cours d’enregistrement.

MARQUES

Sun, Sun Microsystems, le logo Sun, Sun Microsystems Computer Corporation, Solaris, le Sun Microsystems Computer

Corporation logo, SunSoft, le SunSoft logo, ProWorks, ProWorks/ TeamWare, ProCompiler, Sun-4, SunOS, ONC, ONC+, NFS,

OpenWindows, DeskSet, ToolTalk, SunView, XView, X11/ NeWS, AnswerBook, et Magnify Help sont des marques deposées ou

enregistrées par Sun Microsystems, Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans certains autres pays. UNIX est une marque enregistrée aux Etats-

Unis et dans d’autres pays, et exclusivement licenciée par X/ Open Company Ltd. OPEN LOOK est une marque enregistrée de

Novell, Inc. PostScript et Display PostScript sont des marques d’Adobe Systems, Inc. PowerPC™ est une marque deposée de

International Business Machines Corporation. HP ^®and HP-UX ^®sont des marques enregistrées par Hewlett-Packard Company.

Toutes les marques SPARC sont des marques deposées ou enregitrées de SPARC International, Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans

d’autres pays. SPARCcenter, SPARCcluster, SPARCompiler, SPARCdesign, SPARC811, SPARCengine, SPARCprinter,

SPARCserver, SPARstation, SPARCstorage, SPARCworks, microSPARC, microSPARC-II, et UltraSPARC sont exclusivement

licenciées a Sun Microsystems, Inc. Les produits portant les marques sont basés sur une architecture développée par Sun

Microsystems, Inc.

Les utilisateurs d’interfaces graphiques OPEN LOOK^®et Sun™ ont été développés par Sun Microsystems, Inc. pour ses

utilisateurs et licenciés. Sun reconnait les efforts de pionniers de Xerox pour la recherche et le développement du concept des

interfaces d’utilisation visuelle ou graphique pour l’industrie de l’informatique. Sun détient une licence non exclusive de Xerox

sur l’interface d’utilisation graphique, cette licence couvrant aussi les licenciés de Sun qui mettent en place OPEN LOOK GUIs et

qui en outre se conforment aux licences écrites de Sun.

Le système X Window est un produit du X Consortium, Inc.

CETTE PUBLICATION EST FOURNIE "EN L’ETAT" SANS GARANTIE D’AUCUNE SORTE, NI EXPRESSE NI IMPLICITE, Y

COMPRIS, ET SANS QUE CETTE LISTE NE SOIT LIMITATIVE, DES GARANTIES CONCERNANT LA VALEUR

MARCHANDE, L’APTITUDE DES PRODUITS A REPONDRE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU LE FAIT QU’ILS NE

SOIENT PAS CONTREFAISANTS DE PRODUITS DE TIERS.

CETTE PUBLICATION PEUT CONTENIR DES MENTIONS TECHNIQUES ERRONEES OU DES ERREURS

TYPOGRAPHIQUES. DES CHANGEMENTS SONT PERIODIQUEMENT APPORTES AUX INFORMATIONS CONTENUES

AUX PRESENTES. CES CHANGEMENTS SERONT INCORPORES AUX NOUVELLES EDITIONS DE LA PUBLICATION.

SUN MICROSYSTEMS INC. PEUT REALISER DES AMELIORATIONS ET/ OU DES CHANGEMENTS DANS LE(S)

PRODUIT(S) ET/ OU LE(S) PROGRAMME(S) DECRITS DANS DETTE PUBLICATION A TOUS MOMENTS.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Greenheck Fan Ventilation Hood ERV 251 User Manual
Grizzly Switch G8296 User Manual
Gyration Mouse Full Size Keyboard User Manual
Haier Flat Panel Television HL26K User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Paint Sprayer 93302 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Vacuum Cleaner 94683 User Manual
Healthrider Treadmill HRTL12910 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Printer 1000C User Manual
Hunter Fan Fan Ceiling Fan Light Kits User Manual
Image Treadmill IMTL119050 User Manual